Morbidelli+Author+330+User+&+Maintenance+Manual

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 306

USER AND MAINTENACE MANUAL

This manual must be kept for future reference and must always remain with the machine

AUTHOR 330
USER AND MAINTENACE MANUAL

Rel. 2.1 / 02-2008 EN

Cod. 0000512183G - EN

CNC BORING AND ROUTING CENTRE

SCM GROUP S.p.A. - MORBIDELLI


Strada Montefeltro 81/3
61100 PESARO
Tel. 0721/4451 - Fax 0721/ 445264

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
MANUFACTURER: SCM GRUP S.p.A. - MORBIDELLI

ADDRESS: Strada Montefeltro 81/3 - 61100 - Pesaro (Italy)

TYPE OF DOCUMENT: USER AND MAINTENACE MANUAL

DOCUMENT CODE:

EDITION: Rel. 2.1 / 02-2008

PRODUCT: AUTHOR 330

MODEL: AUTHOR 330

SERIAL NO.:

CUSTOMER:

CUSTOMER SERIAL NO.:

YEAR OF MANUFACTURE:

PRINT DATE: 17/03/2008

CONFORMITY:

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX
1 General and Safety information ..................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Machine Identification.............................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Contact Address....................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 General information ................................................................................................................. 6
1.4 Terminology and Symbols ...................................................................................................... 7
1.4.1 Terminology and Symbols in User Manual ......................................................................... 8
1.4.2 Symbols on the machine .................................................................................................... 10
1.4.2.1 Safety signs and plates - Position .................................................................................. 13
1.4.3 Units tables .......................................................................................................................... 15
1.5 Machine Description .............................................................................................................. 16
1.5.1 Operating units description ............................................................................................... 16
1.5.2 Description of the Electrical Cabinet................................................................................. 18
1.6 Using the Machine.................................................................................................................. 19
1.6.1 Materials workable .............................................................................................................. 19
1.6.2 Machinings admitted........................................................................................................... 19
1.6.3 Usable working tools .......................................................................................................... 20
1.6.4 Environmental conditions .................................................................................................. 20
1.6.5 Working position ................................................................................................................. 21
1.7 Prohibitions ............................................................................................................................ 22
1.7.1 Materials not workable........................................................................................................ 22
1.7.2 Non admitted machinings .................................................................................................. 22
1.7.3 Non usable working tools................................................................................................... 22
1.7.4 Places in which the machine cannot be installed ............................................................ 23
1.7.5 Non admitted usage modalities ......................................................................................... 23
1.7.6 Tamperings .......................................................................................................................... 23
1.8 Safety information.................................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 Operator safety.................................................................................................................... 25
1.8.1.1 Noise.................................................................................................................................. 26
1.8.1.2 Dust ................................................................................................................................... 26
1.8.2 Safety norms on the machine ............................................................................................ 27
1.8.3 Safety norms for tools ........................................................................................................ 28
1.8.4 Safety norms in the maintenance ...................................................................................... 29
1.8.5 Operator training ................................................................................................................. 29
1.8.6 Warning for installing and configuring PC-OFFICE ......................................................... 30
1.9 Residual risks ......................................................................................................................... 31
1.10 Actions in case of exceptional circumstances.................................................................. 31

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX

2 Safety devices ................................................................................................................................. 1


2.1 Safety devices description ...................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Emergency cable................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.2 Mushroom-head emergency stop push-buttons ................................................................ 5
2.1.3 Machining unit cover ............................................................................................................ 6
2.1.4 Bumpers................................................................................................................................. 7
2.1.5 Perimeter fence ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.6 Testing safety devices ........................................................................................................ 11

3 Technical Characteristics............................................................................................................... 1
3.1 General Technical Characteristics ......................................................................................... 3
3.2 Noisiness level ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 Overall Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 5
3.4 Working Dimensions................................................................................................................ 6
3.5 Axis Stroke (TV worktable)...................................................................................................... 7

4 Transport and machine installation............................................................................................... 1


4.1 Handling .................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 Packing / Storage .................................................................................................................. 4
4.1.2 Handling the machine after installation .............................................................................. 5
4.1.3 Cleaning the machine on receipt ......................................................................................... 6
4.2 Positioning................................................................................................................................ 7
4.3 Installing the Machine.............................................................................................................. 8
4.4 Removing the securing blocks and brackets ........................................................................ 9
4.5 Assembling the dismantled parts......................................................................................... 10
4.5.1 Fitting the Protective Fences ............................................................................................. 11
4.5.2 Connecting up the Vacuum Pump..................................................................................... 14
4.6 Levelling.................................................................................................................................. 15
4.6.1 Anchoring ............................................................................................................................ 15
4.7 Electrical Connections........................................................................................................... 16
4.8 Pneumatic Connections ........................................................................................................ 19
4.9 Connections to the Chips Vacuum System ......................................................................... 20
4.9.1 Connection to the centralised sawdust/shavings extractor (Optional) ......................... 22
4.9.2 Dust extraction conveyor (Optional) ................................................................................. 23

5 Controls general description ......................................................................................................... 1

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX
5.1 Controls general description .................................................................................................. 2
5.1.1 Mobile push-button control panel: precautions for use .................................................... 3
5.2 Main Control Panel................................................................................................................... 4
5.3 Remote push button control panel......................................................................................... 6
5.4 Controls on working tables ..................................................................................................... 9
5.5 Software push button panel (Paddle screen) ...................................................................... 12

6 Use and general adjustments of the standard machine.............................................................. 1


6.1 Use and Programming ............................................................................................................. 3
6.2 Starting and Stopping.............................................................................................................. 4
6.2.1 Starting................................................................................................................................... 4
6.2.2 Stopping................................................................................................................................. 5
6.3 Using operator interface on the PC ........................................................................................ 6
6.3.1 Note on function mode ......................................................................................................... 7
6.4 Machining procedures ............................................................................................................. 9
6.4.1 Loading of machining programs ....................................................................................... 10
6.4.2 Positioning a Panel ............................................................................................................. 12
6.4.3 Shavings/waste removal..................................................................................................... 14
6.4.4 Risks of collisions with horizontal routing units ............................................................. 21
6.4.5 Risks of collisions with vertical routing units .................................................................. 21
6.5 Setting up the Machine .......................................................................................................... 22
6.5.1 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................................. 23
6.6 Machine emergency state reset procedure ......................................................................... 24
6.6.1 Procedure for resetting an emergency during machining .............................................. 24
6.6.2 Reset procedure after a cycle stop (Hold) ........................................................................ 27
6.6.3 Emergency restore procedure during a tool changing in MDI........................................ 27
6.7 Programming .......................................................................................................................... 28
6.7.1 Defining the work faces and the machining zones .......................................................... 28
6.7.2 Definition of "OFFSET" for Optional Units ....................................................................... 30
6.7.3 JERK functions.................................................................................................................... 32
6.8 Use of additional stop (Optional).......................................................................................... 33
6.9 Sanding tools.......................................................................................................................... 35

7.2 "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS ......................................................................... 1


7.2.1 Work table "TV - Morbidelli" type ........................................................................................ 2
7.2.2 Technical Characteristics..................................................................................................... 3
7.2.3 Work table configurations .................................................................................................... 4

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX
7.2.3.1 Positioning - removing the central stop bars .................................................................. 6
7.2.4 Description of the pushbutton control panel ..................................................................... 7
7.2.5 Positioning and tooling-up the work table.......................................................................... 8
7.2.5.1 Positioning and tooling-up the work table with suction cups ....................................... 8
7.2.5.3 Loading aids ..................................................................................................................... 11
7.2.5.4 Positioning a Panel .......................................................................................................... 12
7.2.5.5 Installation of auxiliary vacuum (working by jig ) - Optional....................................... 13
7.2.5.6 Laser device for vacuum cups positioning (Optional) ................................................. 14
7.2.6 Maintenance......................................................................................................................... 15

8.21 Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type cutter
\(Optional\) - Rel. 1.1........................................................................................................................ 1
8.21 Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles............................................................ 3
8.21.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 4
8.21.2 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................................. 7
8.21.2.1 Tooling up ......................................................................................................................... 7
8.21.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles .................................................. 8
8.21.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters.................................................................................................. 9
8.21.3 Maintenance and lubrication............................................................................................ 11

8.29 Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles \(Optional\) - Rel. 1.1................................... 1
8.29 Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles.............................................................. 3
8.29.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 4
8.29.2 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................................. 6
8.29.2.1 Tooling up ......................................................................................................................... 6
8.29.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles .................................................. 7
8.29.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters.................................................................................................. 8
8.29.3 Maintenance and lubrication.............................................................................................. 9

9.28 HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw \(9Hp\) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 \(Optional\)................................... 1
9.28 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector .................................................................. 2
9.28.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 4
9.28.2 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................................. 6
9.28.2.1 Tooling up ......................................................................................................................... 7
9.28.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting .............................. 8
9.28.2.3 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle ................................................................................. 9
9.28.2.4 Sanding tools.................................................................................................................... 9

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX
9.28.3 Maintenance and lubrication............................................................................................ 10
. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance........................................................................ 11

9.44 HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw \(10-15Hp\) Electric spindle \(TOP\) - Rel. 2.0 ............................. 1
9.44 7,5/11kw (10/15Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector....................................................... 3
9.44.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 5
9.44.1.1 Toolholder spindle with "ER32" collet for tools with cylindrical hold ........................ 6
9.44.1.2 Toolholder spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools................................................. 7
9.44.2 Fitting the Tools ................................................................................................................ 12
9.44.2.1 Tooling up ....................................................................................................................... 13
9.44.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting ............................ 14
9.44.2.3 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools ................... 15
9.44.2.4 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle ............................................................................... 16
9.44.2.5 Sanding tools.................................................................................................................. 16
9.44.3 Maintenance and lubrication............................................................................................ 17
. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance........................................................................ 18
9.44.3.1 Heat exchanger............................................................................................................... 21

9.61 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation \(Optional\) - Rel. 2.1....................................... 1
9.61 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) ............................................... 3
9.61.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 4
9.61.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters..................................................................................................... 5

9.62 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation \(Optional\) - Rel. 2.1..................................... 1
9.62 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360 rotation (Optional)............................................... 3
9.62.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 4
9.62.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters..................................................................................................... 5

9.63 Horizontal router unit \(Optional\) - Rel. 2.3 .................................................................................. 1


Horizontal router unit (Optional).................................................................................................... 2
9.63.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................... 3
9.63.2 Mounting Horizontal Router ............................................................................................... 4
9.63.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters..................................................................................................... 5

10.11Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - \(Optional\) - Rel. 1.0 ................................................. 1


10.11 Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR TOP (Optional)......................................................... 2
10.11.1 Technical Characteristics................................................................................................. 4

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
INDEX
10.11.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting ............................... 6
10.11.2.1 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools ................... 7
10.11.3 Manual movements ........................................................................................................... 8
10.11.4 Loading tools on the magazine...................................................................................... 10
10.11.5 Maintenance and lubrication.......................................................................................... 14

20 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................... 1
20.1 Warnings ................................................................................................................................. 2
20.2 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 5
20.3 Periodic Checks and Maintenance ....................................................................................... 5
. Filter unit ....................................................................................................................................... 6
. Vacuum pump precleaner ........................................................................................................... 7
. Cleaning the electrical cabinet air filters ................................................................................... 8
. VACUUM PUMP MAINTENANCE................................................................................................. 9
20.3.1 Empty the compressed air tanks ..................................................................................... 10
20.3.2 Check of pressure regulator units................................................................................... 11
20.4 Periodic Lubrication............................................................................................................. 12
. VACUUM PUMP LUBRICATION................................................................................................. 18
. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance........................................................................ 19
20.4.1 Centralised Lubrication Unit (OPTIONAL) ...................................................................... 22
20.5 Table of greases and oils .................................................................................................... 24
20.6 Maintenance table ................................................................................................................ 25
20.6.1 Programmed maintenance card....................................................................................... 26
20.7 Inconvenients, causes and solutions (showing by NCC)................................................. 28
20.8 Dismantling........................................................................................................................... 55

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

INDEX

1.1 Machine Identification..........................................................................................4

1.2 Contact Address ..................................................................................................5

1.3 General information .............................................................................................6

1.4 Terminology and Symbols ...................................................................................7

1.4.1 Terminology and Symbols in User Manual..........................................................8

1.4.2 Symbols on the machine ...................................................................................10

1.4.2.1 Safety signs and plates - Position .....................................................................13

1.4.3 Units tables........................................................................................................15

1.5 Machine Description ..........................................................................................16

1.5.1 Operating units description................................................................................16

1.5.2 Description of the Electrical Cabinet..................................................................18

1.6 Using the Machine.............................................................................................19

1.6.1 Materials workable.............................................................................................19

1.6.2 Machinings admitted..........................................................................................19

1.6.3 Usable working tools .........................................................................................20

1.6.4 Environmental conditions ..................................................................................20

1.6.5 Working position ................................................................................................21

1.7 Prohibitions........................................................................................................22

1.7.1 Materials not workable.......................................................................................22

1.7.2 Non admitted machinings ..................................................................................22

1.7.3 Non usable working tools ..................................................................................22

1.7.4 Places in which the machine cannot be installed ..............................................23

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 1/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.7.5 Non admitted usage modalities .........................................................................23

1.7.6 Tamperings........................................................................................................23

1.8 Safety information..............................................................................................24

1.8.1 Operator safety..................................................................................................25

1.8.1.1 Noise .................................................................................................................26

1.8.1.2 Dust ...................................................................................................................26

1.8.2 Safety norms on the machine............................................................................27

1.8.3 Safety norms for tools........................................................................................28

1.8.4 Safety norms in the maintenance ......................................................................29

1.8.5 Operator training................................................................................................29

1.8.6 Warning for installing and configuring PC-OFFICE ...........................................30

1.9 Residual risks ....................................................................................................31

1.10 Actions in case of exceptional circumstances ...................................................31

Chap. 1 - Pag. 2/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

. -
(doc-cd_1.0b_ce~std)

The documentations with the machine are composed of :

- User and maintenance manual in paper copy (this one)


- Electric and pneumatic circuit arrangements in paper copy
- Statement of "EC" conformity*

The pneumatic diagrams are intended for the exclusive use of qualified technicians, the information is
therefore only in Italian and English.

*THE "CE CONFORMITY DECLARATION " IS COMPILED IN SINGLE COPY AND IT MUST BE
ALWAYS IN POSSESSION OF THE OWNER OF THE MACHINE AND IT HAS ALWAYSTO BE
SUPPLIED WITH THE MACHINE

Compact Disk contains:


- User and maintenance manual
- Electric and pneumatic circuit arrangements
- User and programming manual
- Spare parts catalogue
- Technical generic documentations of machine components is not necessarely included

Inside the CD-rom enclosed to the documentation of the machine there is the official version of the
use and maintenance manual in Italian language written by SCM Group S.p.A.
(1)
The software manuals are intended for the exclusive use of competent technicians and are
therefore only in Italian, English, German, Spanish and French.
(1)
The electric and pneumatic drawings are only for the use of expert technicians for this reason
they have been written in Italian, English, German, Spanish and French.
(1)
the supply includes only one of these languages

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 3/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.1 Machine Identification
(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.1ce~std)

Plate A is marked with the identification data for the machine. Please quote this data when making technical
enquiries or ordering spare parts.

The plate is located on the frame (see fig. 1.1b) and shows the following data:

- Marca = Merchandise mark


- Tipo = Machine type
- Anno = Production year
- N° Serie = Serial number
- kg = Weight (kg)
- Un V = Rated voltage (volt)
-~ = Phases number (alternate current)
- In A = Rated current (ampere)
-F Hz = Frequency (hertz)
- Icc. kA = Short circuit breaking capacity of the protective device (kA)
- w.d. = Wiring diagram number
- Mod. = Machine model
- Comp. = Machine version
- Ref. = Internal references

It is a good idea to write down the machine identification data on this page for ready reference.

SCM GROUP spa


Str. Montefeltro, 81/3
I - 61100 Pesaro (PU) - ITALY

MARCA
MAKE
TIPO ANNO
TYPE YEAR
N|B SERIE Kg
SERIAL N|B
Un V In A F Hz

I cc kA w.d.

MOD. REF.

COMP.
TRG_46e

Trg_46e $-UM527

Fig. 1.1a Fig. 1.1b

Chap. 1 - Pag. 4/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.2 Contact Address


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.2)

When writing to or calling the dealer or Morbidelli for any reason relative to the machine, always have the following
information ready:
- Machine model
- Year of construction
- Serial number
- Voltage and frequency

For any request and/or information contact:

SCM GROUP S.p.A. - MORBIDELLI


Strada Montefeltro 81/3 - 61100 PESARO - Italy

Operator: Tel. 0039, 0721/4451 -- Telefax 0039, 0721/445264

E-mail: morbidelli@ scmgroup.com

Assistence department: Tel. 0039, 0721/445600 -- Telefax 0039, 0721/445216

Spare parts department: Tel. 0039, 0721/445217 -- Telefax 0039, 0721/445216

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 5/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.3 General information
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.3)

NOTE: In the manual the terms "Morbidelli" and "manufacturer" substitute the full name SCM
GROUP S.p.A. - Morbidelli
The constructor supplies this handbook, in order to give all the information and the instructions
which are necessary for a correct usage of the machine.

The addressee of this handbook is the staff charged with the work on the machine: it needs to be professionally
qualified as far as its task is concerned and it has to read the handbooks by making kind attention to the security
rules and to the paragraphs dealing with its own task.

THE SYMBOLOGIES OF REFERENCE FOR THE STAFF USING THE MACHINE ARE AS FOLLOWS:

chapters assigned to the production user. He mustn't carry out any setting up or machine equipment
operations.

chapters assigned to the expert user charged with the equipment and the setting up of the machine.

chapters assigned to the expert user charged with the machine programming.

chapters assigned to the user charged with the maintenance.

NOTE:The chapters that lack specific symbols as above described, are to be understood for the
whole staff charged with the machine.

SMB124
It is recommended not to carry out any operation not described in this manual.

CAUTION:
- All operations requiring assembly or disassembly of parts must be carried out by authorised
technicians.
- OBSERVE THE ACCIDENT-PREVENTION REGULATIONS AND THE RULES OF SAFETY AND
INDUSTRIAL MEDICINE IN FORCE IN THE COUNTRY WHERE THE MACHINE IS USED.
- The aim of this manual is to prevent accidents to persons and damage to machinery. Please read
it carefully, paying special attention to the text preceded by the words Warning, Caution,
Important or Note and to text in underlined, bold type.
- Use of this manual is the sole responsibility of the user. Operations not described in it, or not
performed according to instructions if they are described, are forbidden. Any operator who
performs unauthorised operations or fails to follow instructions must accept full responsibility
for the result of his/her actions.
- The constant observation of the instructions in it contained guarantees: safety for the man and
the machine, operation saving and a longer length of the machine functioning.

- The machine is equipped with an electronic control device for programming all of the panel
machining operations; the utilisation modes are described in the attached manual.

This manual must be kept for future reference and must always remain with the machine.
Some of the pictures in this handbook may not exactly correspond with the true configuration of
the machine: this doesn't have no influence on the validity of the information and instructions
supplied and doesn't compromise, therefore, the user safety.

Chap. 1 - Pag. 6/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.4 Terminology and Symbols


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.4)

NOTE: The present manual applies to all versions of machines. Instructions and information
applicable only to a particular version or versions are indicated with a Note or symbol. Unless
otherwise specified with a Note or symbol, instructions and information apply to all versions.

Ensure that the labels are always clearly visible. Substitute any labels which are damaged or
illegible. Always observe the safety labels on the machine.

SMB005
ATTENTION: indicates dangerous situations and/or conditions

SMB124
PROHIBITION: it shows the duty of not carrying out any manoeuvres, controls or anything else
that can create conditions very dangerous for the man or harmful for the machine.

smb114a
PRECAUTION: indicates situations that might be dangerous if not carefully respected.

SMB121
WARNING / NOTE: indicates situations and/or recommendations to pay attention to

i Read the manual and follow the manufacturer's instructions

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 7/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.4.1 Terminology and Symbols in User Manual
(a632t_1.0_ce_bps_1.4.1)

chapters assigned to the production user.

chapters assigned to the expert user charged with the equipment and the setting up of the
machine.

chapters assigned to the expert user charged with the machine programming

chapters assigned to the user charged with the maintenance

Specific for electro spindles with ISO30 fitting

Specific for electro spindles with HSK63 fitting

Specific for electro spindles with MK2 fitting

Feature supplied only on request

SMB054
CNC - CN Abbreviations for Numeric Control

Machine operator

No-access area with on or operating machine

SMB056

(R - D)
Right rotation (Clockwise)

SMB057

(L - S)
Left rotation (Anti-clockwise)

Chap. 1 - Pag. 8/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

SMB044
Vertical routing unit

SMB045
Drilling unit for hinges

X
SMB046
Fixed disc routing unit for grooving along "X" axis

SMB047
Fixed disc routing unit for grooving along "Y" axis

X
SMB048
Disc routing unit with manual positioning in "X" or "Y" axes

SMB050
0∞- 90∞
Disc routing unit with automatic positioning in "X" or "Y" axes

SMB049
0∞-360∞ Disc routing unit with automatic positioning 0°-360° (with "vector" device)

SMB064
Unit with horizontal routing and cutter disk

SMB080
0∞-360∞
Unit with horizontal routing and cutter disk with automatic positioning 0°-360° (with
"vector" device)

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 9/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.4.2 Symbols on the machine
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.4.2_inp)

SMB004

DANGER: ELECTRICAL CURRENT

SMB005
GENERAL DANGER

SMB001
Device for lifting by hook

SMB006 Pneumatic power switch

SMB007
Electrical power switch

i
Read the manual and follow the manufacturer's instructions

SMB009
Lock

SMB010
Release

SMB011
Automatic cycle

SMB014
Vacuum pump

Chap. 1 - Pag. 10/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

SMB015
Pneumatic power

SMB025
Stop

SMB026
Start

SMB062
Rapid traverse

SMB065
Feed

SMB072
Hold

SMB074
Machine functions enabled

SMB075
Machine functions disabled

SMB076
Editing block

Direction Axis X

Direction Axis Y

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 11/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN

Direction Axis Z

Forks insertion point for lifting the machine with a fork lift truck

Loading instructions

Weight: kg...

Chap. 1 - Pag. 12/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.4.2.1 Safety signs and plates - Position


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.4.2.1_inp)

NOTE: The signs and plates must be inspected and cleaned regularly to keep them clear and
legible.

If the signs and plates are not clearly legible, contact the manufacturer for their replacement.
In case of replacement, operate as follows:
- Remove the old sign or plate.
- Clean the area with detergent.
- Fit the new sign or plate, respecting the position and orientation of the old one.

. -
(a330_2.0_ce_bps_1.4.2.1)

Stickers for the machine

. -

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 13/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.4.2.1b)

Stickers for electrical cabinet

1.
IT - ISTRUZIONI DI SICUREZZA
Questa è una macchina pericolosa che deve essere
settata ed utilizzata correttamente ed in modo sicuro.
Solo operatori esperti, adeguatamente formati possono
1.
EN - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This is a dangerous machine which must be set up and


used correctly and safely.
0302110281L (IT-EN-FR-DE)
0302110282B (EN-ES-PT-NL)
utilizzare la macchina. Only suitably trained, skilled operators may use the machine.
2. Non settare o utilizzare questa macchina prima di aver 2. Before setting up or using this machine you must read and
SMB001 letto e compreso il manuale uso e manutenzione.
understand the use and maintenance manual. In particular:
In particolare:
- regularly check the efficiency of the safety devices as

0302110195G
- verificare periodicamente l'efficienza dei dispositivi di
described in the use and maintenance manual..
sicurezza come descritto nel manuale uso e manutenzione.

0302110283D (EN-SV-DK-NO)
Never remove or disable the safety devices, covers and
Non rimuovere mai o rendere inefficaci i dispositivi di
guards
sicurezza, i ripari ed i carter
- utilizzare la macchina solo per effettuare lavorazioni - only use the machine for the machining indicated in the use
ammesse nel manuale uso e manutenzione rispettando and maintenance manual, observing the limitations shown
le limitazioni ivi indicate - follow the machine lock out procedure described in the
use and maintenance manual before carrying out regular

0302110284H (EN-FI-PL-LT)
- seguire la procedura di blocco macchina indicata nel
maintenance work (cleaning i ,lubrication i,

0302110146D
manuale uso e manutenzione prima di eseguire le
operazioni periodiche di manutenzione (pulizia i , adjustment i )

0302110035H
lubrificazione i , regolazione i )
Failure to read and understand the use and maintenance
Non leggere e comprendere il manuale uso e manutenzione
ii manual and all of the safety symbols may lead to

0302110285F (EN-GR-CS-SK)
e tutti i simboli di sicurezza può dare origine a gravi lesioni. serious injuries.
Il Manuale deve rimanere con la macchina The manual must remain with the machine

FR - CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ DE - SICHERHEITSANWEISUNGEN


1. Cette machine est dangereuse : elle doit donc être réglée 1. Dies ist eine gefährliche Maschine, die ordnungsgemäß und

0302110286A (EN-ET-LV-SL)
et utilisée correctement et de manière sûre. sicher eingestellt und angewendet werden muss.
Seuls les opérateurs experts, après formation, sont autorisés Nur erfahrene Bediener, die entsprechend ausgebildet sind,
à utiliser la machine. dürfen diese Maschine anwenden.
2. Die Maschine darf weder eingestellt noch verwendet werden,
2. Ne pas régler ou utiliser cette machine avant d'avoir lu et
bevor die Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitung durchgelesen
compris le manuel d'utilisation et d'entretien. und verstanden wurde.
Notamment:

0302110287C (EN-IT-HU-RU)
Weiter ist im Einzelnen Folgendes zu tun:
- vérifier périodiquement l'efficacité des dispositifs de - Prüfen Sie regelmäßig die Funktionstüchtigkeit der Sicherheits-
sécurité en suivant les instructions du manuel d'utilisation vorrichtungen, wie in der Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitung
et d'entretien. Ne jamais démonter ou inhiber les dispositifs beschrieben. Die Sicherheitsvorrichtungen, die Schutz-
de sécurité, les protecteurs et les carters einrichtungen und die Gehäuse dürfen niemals entfernt oder
- n'utiliser la machine que pour effectuer les usinages in ihrer Funktion eingeschränkt werden.
indiqués dans le manuel d'utilisation et d'entretien en - Verwenden Sie die Maschine nur für Bearbeitungen, die in
respectant les limitations qui y sont indiquées der Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitung vorgesehen sind, und
- suivre la procédure de blocage machine indiquée dans la halten Sie sich an die darin angegebenen Einschränkungen.
- Führen Sie den in der Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitung
notice d'utilisation et d'entretien avant d'effectuer les
beschriebenen Vorgang zum Sperren der Maschine durch,
opérations périodiques d'entretien (nettoyage i , bevor Sie die regelmäßigen Wartungsarbeiten (Reinigung i ,
lubrification i , réglage i ) Schmierung i , und Einstellung i vornehmen)
Ne pas lire et ne pas comprendre le manuel d'utilisation Wenn die Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitung nicht durchgelesen
et d'entretien ainsi que tous les symboles de sécurité peut und verstanden wird und nicht alle Sicherheitssymbole bekannt
i être à l'origine d'accidents graves. i sind, kann dies zu schweren Verletzungen führen.
Le manuel doit toujours accompagner la machine Das Handbuch muss bei der Maschine verbleiben.
0302110281L

0302110261G (IT-EN-FR-DE)
I ON
O OFF

0302110076E IT ATTENZIONE !: L'INTERRUTTORE


GENERALE NON INTERROMPE 0302110262L (EN-ES-PT-NL)
L'ALIMENTAZIONE PNEUMATICA
EN WARNING !: THE MAIN SWITCH
DOES NOT SWITCH OFF THE
COMPRESSED AIR 0302110263B (EN-SV-DK-NO)
0302110264D (EN-FI-PL-LT)
FR ATTENTION !: L'INTERRUPTEUR
GENERAL NE COUPE PAS
L'ALIMENTATION PNEUMATIQUE
DE ACHTUNG !: DER HAUPTSCHALTER

0302110265F (EN-GR-CS-SK)
UNTERBRICHT DIE PNEUMATISCHE
VERSORGUNG NICHT
0302110261G

0302110266H (EN-ET-LV-SL)
SMB001
0302110267A (EN-IT-HU-RU)
0302110195G

i
0302110109F
0302110261G
Schema_targhe_U2412_02
0302110109F

. -
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.4.2.1c)

Stickers for lubrication pump


Stickers for pneumatic regulator-filter automatic (optional)

0302110108D

i i
0341519027H
0302110108D

i
0302110119
0302110110G

i P= 6,5 bar
Schema_targhe_Filtro-reg-pn_01 Schema_targhe_pompa-lubr_01

Chap. 1 - Pag. 14/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.4.3 Units tables


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.4.3)

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT Conversion S.I.


kg Kilogram Weight Weight 9,807N
-3
mm Millimetres Length 1x10 m
m/sec Metres/second Speed m/s
m/min Metres/minute Speed 1/60 m/s
Revolution per
Rpm Speed of rotation 2ð :60 rad/s
minute
NL Normal litres Volume
3 -6 3
cm Cubic centimetres Volume 1x10 m
2 -6 2
mm Squared millimetres Area 1x10 m
3
kw Kilowatt Power 1x10 w
Hz Hertz Frequency Hz
V Volts Electric voltage V
A Amperes Current intensity A
-3
g/sec Grams/second Tools balance 1x10 kg/s
3 3 3
m /h Cubic metres/ hour Capacity m /3,6x10 s
3 Cubic 3
m /sec Capacity m /s
metres/second
2
Pa Pascal Pressure N/m
5 2
bar Bar Pressure 1x10 N/m
°C Celsius degrees Temperature K
dB Decibel Sound pressure
N Newton Force
Nm Newton metre Torque
Hp (CV) Horsepower Power 735,49 W
Lux Lux Illumination lx

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 15/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.5 Machine Description
(a330_2.0_ce_bps_1.5)

This machine is a numerically controlled boring and routing centre designed for the most specialised machining
requirements.

The structure has two main elements:


- the load-bearing base A (fig. 1.5a)
- the single-piece upright B which moves along the X-axis

The machining unit C consists of a electrospindle mounted on a slide D which is moved on the upright B mobile
along the Y-axis and includes movement along the Z-axis.

All movements involve sliding on prismatic guides with recirculating ball screws. The movements are made
possible using top quality recirculating ball screws. On some models or optionals the X-axis movement can be
created with a high quality rack and pinion.

The base is fitted with the worktables E and the reference stops for workpiece positioning.
The worktables consist of extruded aluminium alloy bars mounted on supports containing recirculating ball
bushings and pneumatic locking devices. The worktables move along the X-axis on round, ground steel bars.

The suction cups F (fig. 1.5b) are fitted in the worktables, to secure the workpieces by means of the vacuum.
These suction cups are positioned by sliding them on the table along the Y-axis.

The machine control unit is installed on an electrical cabinet G connected to the machine by sheaths H long
enough to allow free positioning (observing the machine minimum distances).

1.5.1 Operating units description


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_1.5.1)

The machine can be equipped with the following units:

- one drilling unit with 7 vertical spindles (5 in "X" direction, 3 in "Y" direction
- one drilling unit with 12 vertical spindles (8 in "X" direction, 5 in "Y" direction)
- one drilling unit with 12 vertical spindles (8 in "X" direction, 5 in "Y" direction)
- 2+2 horizontal spindles in "X" direction
- 1+1 horizontal spindles in "Y" direction
- HSK 63 connection 6,6 / 7,5 / 11kW (9 / 10 / 15Hp) Electric spindle (Optional)
- Magazine type RAPID with 12 positions - HSK63
- Saw blade unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation
- Saw blade unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation
- Horizontal router unit
- Horizontal router unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation

Chap. 1 - Pag. 16/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

-
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_1.5b)

F
F

$-UM445p

Fig. 1.5a Fig. 1.5b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 17/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.5.2 Description of the Electrical Cabinet
(a330_1.0_ce_ftc_1.5.1)

The electrical and electronic components are located in a stand-alone cabinet.


The machining cycle is managed by a numeric control made to state-of-the-art technology, in order to achieve high
speeds, computing power and simultaneous performance of different functions.

The machine functions are controlled by the "A" PC, installed on the B console and the C remote control (See fig.
1.5.1a).

NOTE: On the electrical cabinet there is a main switch (Fig. 1.5.1a) which operates on the power
supply.

WARNING: BEFORE OPENING THE DOORS OF THE ELECTRICAL CABINET FOR ANY REASON,
ALWAYS TURN THE MAIN SWITCH TO THE ZERO POSITION AND LOCK IT .
ALWAYS GIVE THE KEY TO THE ELECTRICAL CABINET TO THE HEAD OF MAINTENANCE.
ONLY SPECIALISED ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS MAY CARRY OUT WORK ON ELECTRICAL
DEVICES.

D Z4

Z5
W
Z3
Z2

C
Z

B
V

A
Y

JOG + JOG -

N
IO

C
F1 F2

F3 F4 F5 F6
O OFF

O
OFF
$-UM534a

NO
I
FFO O

Author_430-top_AL8080_02

Fig. 1.5.1a

Chap. 1 - Pag. 18/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.6 Using the Machine


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.6)

This machine is a CNC machining centre designed especially for drilling and routing operations.

SCM declines all responsibility for any damage arising as a result of use not described in this manual or incorrect
maintenance.
Uses which are not allowed include the use of materials which are not specified by the manufacturer, or those
which are outside machine technical specifications.

Arbitrary modifications made to the machine shall relieve the manufacturer of any liability for
damages which may derive from it.

1.6.1 Materials workable


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.6.1)

This machine must only be used for machining wood or similar materials.
"Similar materials" are those materials with technological and physical characteristics similar to those of
wood, so that the machining and chipping removal mechanisms are the same.

Damage caused by machining materials other than those indicated is the responsibility of the user.

Wood or similar materials must be without foreign bodies (e.g. nails, stones, etc.)

1.6.2 Machinings admitted


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.5.2)

This machine is a CNC machining centre designed especially for drilling and routing operations.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 19/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.6.3 Usable working tools
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.6.3)

The machine has been designed in order to use, in routing machinings, only working tools in accordance
with the "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European Standards)" standards

Follow the instructions of the manufacturer for use, adjustment and repair of the tools

SMB124
WARNING: Permitted operating speeds are marked on the tools. Do not exceed these limits.

The types and the dimensions of the tools are indicated in the chapters of the operating groups
(chap. 8... / 9... / 10... / 11... "if presents")

1.6.4 Environmental conditions


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.6.4)

Operating conditions for the machine are as follows:

- Humidity: 90% (max.)


- Temperature: min. + 10°C ; Max + 35°C
- Altitude: 1500m asl (maximum; for higher altitudes, consult the manufacturer)

Sufficient lighting must be provided, general or localised at the workstation, min. 500 LUX

A clear working area around the machine is fundamental for safety: the floor must be flat, well-kept
and free of material, e.g. shavings, scraps, etc.

The machine is designed for use indoors in industrial environments.

Chap. 1 - Pag. 20/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.6.5 Working position


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.5.5)

During the machining the production user will be able to occupy only the working positions shown in LAY-OUT
"Main working areas."

MAIN WORKING ZONES:

1 - Zone reserved for operators during machining


2 - Zone for operator inserting panels (front of machine). Zone which is off limits during machining.
3 - Zone which is always off limits during machining (work table and machine side and rear areas).

1
$-UM509

Fig. 1.6.5a

OPERATOR'S POSITION FOR VISUAL MACHINING CHECKS

OK
$-UM342

Fig. 1.6.5b

The user will be the only responsible of any possible damages to things or people whenever he
adopts positions differing from the ones shown above.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 21/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.7 Prohibitions
(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.7)

1.7.1 Materials not workable


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.6.1_)

IMPORTANT: This machine must not, under any circumstances, be used to machine iron,
aluminium or light alloys, or any materials other than those indicated by the manufacturer.

The user will have to answer for any damages due to the machining of materials differing from the
admitted ones.

1.7.2 Non admitted machinings


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.7.2)

SMB124
it is absolutely forbidden to carry out machinings differing from the ones clearly shown in the
special section of this handbook.

The user will have to answer for any damages occurred during non admitted machinings.

1.7.3 Non usable working tools


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.7.3~usa)

SMB124
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO USE:

-for routing machinings, working tools not in accordance with "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-
2:2000/AC2003 (European Standards)" standards.

BESIDES:
- Do not use cracked, bent or blunt tools: blunt tools not only reduce the quality of work, but
increase the danger of ejection of workpieces or parts of them, tools or parts of them.
- Never use tools at a speed higher than that indicated by the tool manufacturer and never use
tools that are larger in size than the maximum indicated in the appropriate chapters and
paragraphs of this manual.
- Never utilize tools not perfectly balanced

Chap. 1 - Pag. 22/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.7.4 Places in which the machine cannot be installed


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.7.4)

SMB124
The machine cannot be installed:

- Outside
- The machine must not be run in environments classified as potentially explosive in compliance
with standard "94/9/CE".

1.7.5 Non admitted usage modalities


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.7.5)

SMB124
IT IS FORBIDDEN:

- To use the machine in a different way from what shown in this handbook
- to use the machine without the protections or some of their parts foreseen by the constructor
- to use the machine to work pieces with dimensions differing from the admitted ones.
- It is forbidden to utilize the machine if all the devices and protections necessary to work in
complete safety are not positioned correctly, or if they are not in good conditions or if the
maintenance has not been made correctly.

The user is the only responsible of any damages caused by an inappropriate usage.

1.7.6 Tamperings
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.7.6)

SMB124
WARNING: MAKING VARIATIONS TO THE MACHINE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED. NEVER MAKE ANY CHANGES ON THE MACHINE.
THE MANUFACTURER DECLINES ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR INJURY TO PERSONS OR DAMAGE
TO OBJECTS AS A RESULT OF TAMPERING WITH THE MACHINE.

SMB124
Installation of any software other than that installed by SCM Group S.p.A. is strictly forbidden.
Software untested by the manufacturer could interfere with correct operation of the machine.
SCM Group S.p.A. declines all responsibility for faults or damage caused by failure to observe this
warning.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 23/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.8 Safety information
(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.8)

Read this manual carefully before starting the machine, designed and built for maximum safety and
top performance.
The machine must only be used by qualified operators
Persons using, adjusting, maintaining and repairing the machine must be familiar with and
implement all instructions provided, especially in terms of safety.
The operator must never leave the machine unattended while it is operating.
The use of any machine tool involves certain risks. The operator is responsible for his/her safety
and the safety of others.
Failure to observe safety standards always involves a serious risk of accident.
Never use the machine if under the influence of alcohol, drugs or medication.
The operator must be trained in the correct use of guards and safety devices. He/she must also be
trained to carry out periodic inspections on these guards and safety devices.

Some of the pictures in this handbook may not exactly correspond with the true configuration of
the machine: this doesn't have no influence on the validity of the information and instructions
supplied and doesn't compromise, therefore, the user safety.

SMB124
WARNING: MAKING VARIATIONS TO THE MACHINE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED. NEVER MAKE ANY CHANGES ON THE MACHINE.
THE MANUFACTURER DECLINES ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR INJURY TO PERSONS OR DAMAGE
TO OBJECTS AS A RESULT OF TAMPERING WITH THE MACHINE.

WARNING: BEFORE MACHINING, IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO CHECK THE TOOLS ARE


CORRECTLY INSTALLED (SEE CHAP. 8... / 9... / 10... / 11... "IF THEY ARE PRESENT")

Chap. 1 - Pag. 24/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.8.1 Operator safety


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.8.1)

- Always wear suitable work overalls, safety footwear and hats or hairnets.
- Keep all cuffs buttoned up or rolled up so that they cannot become trapped in moving machine
parts.
- Remove all items of personal jewellery or clothing which could cause accidents (rings, watches,
bracelets, chains, ties).
- Ensure that all guards, grills, covers and safety devices are efficient and in place at all times.
- Switch off the main power supply to the machine before commencing any cleaning or
maintenance operations.
- Keep the machine, work surfaces and the working area clean and clear of obstructions at all
times.
- Wear gloves.
- Use ear defenders or ear plugs.
- Make sure that the working area is suitably lit, by the main or local lighting.
- A clear space all around the machine is essential to safety.

-
(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.8.1a)

WARNING:
- Always work from the front of the machine (See chap. 1.6.5).
- Only authorised personnel may enter the working area.
- Load and position the panels from the front of the machine.
- Do not perform checks or maintenance operations on any working area whatsoever of the
machine when the machine is in operation. When the machine is running do not perform any
checks or maintenance in a working area even though the machine might be operating in another
area.
- Do not, under any circumstances, climb onto the machine for any reason while the power supply
or the compressed air supply is on.

WARNING: Do not remove or disenable safety protection or emergency devices for any reason.

SMB124
WARNING: Always use the doors to gain access to the fenced off area around the sides and back
of the machine and do not, under any circumstances attempt to bypass the emergency safety
devices (see subsecs. 2.1...)

SMB124
ATTENTION: IT'S ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN TO ENTER, WITH TOOLS OR SOMETHINNG ELSE,
INTO THE PROTECTIONS AND INTO SAFETY DEVICES OF THE GROUPS OPERATOR.

ATTENTION: IF THE OPERATOR HAS TO REMOVE WASTE MATERIALS HE MUST OPERATE AS


DESCRIBED IN THE CHAPTER 6.4.3

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 25/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.8.1.1 Noise
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.1.1)

The operator must be informed concerning the noise levels which may be generated during normal use of the
machine and the factors which affect the exposure to noise. The factors include:
- correct tool selection;
- correct speed selection;
- tool and machine maintenance;
- type of material machined;
- proper use of personal protection (headsets, earplugs, etc.).

1.8.1.2 Dust
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.1.2)

The operator must be informed concerning the risks caused by exposure to dust and the factors which affect
exposure. These factors include:

- tool and machine maintenance;


- relation between cutting speed and feed speed;
- type of material machined;
- importance of local aspiration on each operating unit (dust collection at source);
- proper adjustment of hoods, deflectors, hoppers;
- proper use of personal protection (masks, etc.).

You MUST connect all of the dust extractor hoods to the extractor network, the suction system
must be connected to the machine and operational before starting machining.

SMB124
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO REMOVE DUST AND SHAVINGS.

Chap. 1 - Pag. 26/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.8.2 Safety norms on the machine


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.2)

- Persons using the machine must concentrate before beginning work and must prevent other,
inexpert or unauthorised persons, from using the machine.
- Never start the machine unless all safety and emergency devices are fitted. These must never be
removed.
- Never carry out machining tests without the necessary guards.
- Never machine workpieces which are too small or too big for the machine.
- Avoid supporting panels by hand during machining. Use the purpose-designed supports.
- Observe all warnings on the machine, whether written or in the form of icons.
- The manufacturer declines all responsibility for unauthorised changes made to the machine and
any damage which may arise as a result of said changes.
- Connect all dust extractor hoods to the vacuum system. Never operate the machine if the
extractor system is off.
- Never remove waste or other parts of the workpiece from the machining area with the machine
still operating (see chap. 6.4.3).
- Before starting the machine, check that there are no extraneous objects on the work table.
- make sure about the efficiency of the earthing plant
-Each new program needs to be tested in order to verify its feasibility in "vacuum", that is without
any pieces or not in rotation working tools (absence of "crash" conditions).
- Report faults in the machine, including guards or tool as soon as they are discovered.
- Adopt safe procedures for cleaning, maintenance and remove chips and dust regurarly to avoid
the risk of fire

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 27/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.8.3 Safety norms for tools
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.3)

- Do not use cracked, bent or blunt tools: blunt tools not only reduce the quality of work, but
increase the danger of ejection of workpieces or parts of them, tools or parts of them.
- Never use tools at a speed higher than that indicated by the tool manufacturer and never use
tools that are larger in size than the maximum indicated in the appropriate chapters and
paragraphs of this manual.
- Handle tools carefully. To avoid damaging the cutting edges, do not place them on metal
surfaces. Use protective gloves to handle cutting edges.
- Store tools in an orderly manner and in a place where they are not accessible to unauthorised
personnel.
- Before fitting any tool in its seat or shaft, check that the contact surfaces are clean, free of marks
and perfectly flat.
- Ensure that all rotary tools are perfectly balanced, sharpened and carefully keyed and tightened.
- When fitting tools, check that the ring nuts or tightening screws do not come undone during
machining (A tool that rotates to the right will have a fastening system with a right screw-thread,
while a tool that rotates to the left will have a fastening system with a left screw-thread: figure
1.8.3a shows the correct way to shut a tool.); also check that the direction of machining matches
the tool rotation (see fig. 1.8.3a).
- Follow the instructions of the working tools' constructor accurately, as far as their usage, their
control and/or their repairing are concerned.
- During set up check that there is no contact between non-rotating tools and any machine element
workpiece locking device.

WARNING: BEFORE MACHINING, IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO CHECK THE TOOLS ARE


CORRECTLY INSTALLED (SEE CHAP. 8... / 9... / 10... / 11... "IF THEY ARE PRESENT")

Figure shows how to correctly tighten a tool on the spindle and the correct direction of feed relative to tool
rotation.
Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento
Machining with the feed direction Machining against the feed direction

R L
Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento
$-UM371a
Machining against the feed direction Machining with the feed direction

Fig. 1.8.3a

WARNING: if you use tools for routing with a cutting diameter greater than 16 mm, these must
comply with EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European Standards).
WARNING: if you use blades these must comply with EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards).
WARNING: drill bits or tools for sanding may be used.

SMB124
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO USE DIFFERENT TOOLS.

Chap. 1 - Pag. 28/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.8.4 Safety norms in the maintenance


(a632_1.0_ce_bps_1.8.4)

Before any maintenance operation, check that the main On/Off switch is padlocked in the OFF
position and the main compressed air supply valve is padlocked in the closed position (see chap.
20.1).

- Ensure that safety devices are always maintained in working order.


- Before removing any protective device for maintenance, adjustments or cleaning, stop the
machine completely.
- Switch off the power using the main On/Off switch, then apply a sign to the machine indicating
that work is being carried out.
- Clean the machine, the floor and the work tables carefully and at the proper intervals. Also keep
decals and plates on the machine clean at all times.
- Regularly remove chippings and dust to prevent fire hazards.
- Do not use compressed air to clean the machine and the surrounding area, but use either
industrial vacuum cleaners or a manual means of cleaning (e.g. brooms, rags, ecc.).
- Any machine fault or defect, including on guards or tools, must be reported as soon as it is
discovered. The machine must be stopped and the necessary action taken.

1.8.5 Operator training


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.5)

It is important that all the operators receive adequate training, which includes information relative to the dangers
associated with use of the machine and the precautions to take.

In particular:
- the machine operating principles, proper use, correct use of the protections which must periodically be
checked;
- how to handle the pieces at the time of use, and reject wood with evident defects (curved, split, knotted,
containing stones, metal, etc.);
- the position of the hands before, during and after machining;
- report falts in the machine, including guards or tool as soon as they are discovered
- the operators must furthermore be trained for firefighting operations.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 29/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
1.8.6 Warning for installing and configuring PC-OFFICE
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.8.6)

SMB124
Do not make any changes to the Operating System configuration, or install hardware or software
program boards different from those supplied with the machine, unless you have request and
received authorisation from SCM Group S.p.A. relative Assistance Centre.

Great care must be taken for example of network connections and accessories consequently authorised by the
various machine software and systems as well as when using any type of modem.
If necessary make an agreement with SCM Group S.p.A. Assistance Centre about ways of intervening that could
even be carried out in close collaboration.

Any different operations not authorised and/or not complying with machine normal functioning
requirements could compromise its regular functioning.

SCM Group S.p.A. do not assume responsibility for any errors, mishandling or inaccuracy that may
occur during any installation or configuration not authorised. Therefore any consequent machine
malfunctions will not be
attributed to the machine itself.

Anyone who carries out such unauthorised operations must be aware that they could result in the warranty for
these malfunctions being invalidated,
therefore any resultant repairs will be the exclusive responsibility of the client.
SCM Group S.p.A. reserve the right to change for their use and consumption the configuration and software used,
without prior warning and without any responsibility to the final client.

Chap. 1 - Pag. 30/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 1 - General and Safety information

1.9 Residual risks


(=a632_1.3_ce_bps_1.9_ce~std)

IMPORTANT: Since you can gain access to the electrical panels in the electrical equipment without
powering down, the key which opens the electrical equipment must be handed over to the
maintenance manager.
Any work that has to be done in the electrical equipment without powering down must be carried
out by specialised electricians.

This machine is equipped with safety devices which comply with the best available in the safety
sector. These safety devices are effective if used correctly and maintained. Although all safety
regulations have been observed use of the machine in accordance with the rules indicated in this
manual may still involve the following residual risks:

- Contact with tools at a standstill.


- Ejection of the workpiece or parts of it (e.g.: due to incorrect workpiece locking and/or machining
waste)
- Ejection of tools or parts of them due to: programming errors (e.g.: retrieval of incorrect tools),
tooling (association of incorrect parameters with a given tool code), loading incorrect tool when
requested directly by the machine, incorrect tool loading in the tool magazine (if present on the
machine), incorrect tool mounting.
- Tool collisions with the worktable and/or reference stops due to programming errors.
- Fire due to a bunching of chips and/or powders.

1.10 Actions in case of exceptional circumstances


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_1.10)

Stop immediately the electrical feeding in case of flooding of the room in which the machine lies.

Stop immediately the electrical feeding and intervene with suitable extinguishers in case of fire: send the
spurt to the basis of the flames.

Even if the machine doesn't seem to have suffered from any damages, let it check by a specialised
technician BEFORE STARTING THE MACHINING AGAIN.

It is necessary to have an area around the machine free from dimensions, in order to allow a quick removal
in case of danger.
Remember that the machine cannot work in explosive rooms.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 1 - Pag. 31/32
AUTHOR 330
1 - General and Safety information EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 1 - Pag. 32/32 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

INDEX

2.1 Safety devices description...................................................................................2

2.1.1 Emergency cable.................................................................................................4

2.1.2 Mushroom-head emergency stop push-buttons ..................................................5

2.1.3 Machining unit cover............................................................................................6

2.1.4 Bumpers ..............................................................................................................7

2.1.5 Perimeter fence ...................................................................................................8

2.1.6 Testing safety devices .......................................................................................11

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 1/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
2.1 Safety devices description
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1)

The safety devices make the machine safe in case of irregular conditions and allow the user to block at the right
time the machine functioning in case of danger or event.

The machine is fitted with the following devices:


- Emergency push button "V"
- Total guard A (fig. 2.1a) protecting the tool slide and the operating units so as to completely isolate the parts
which move along the "Y" axis.
- High-absorption bumpers "B" mounted on the sides of the guard to guarantee the maximum safety in the event of
a collision with an obstacle.
- Splinter containment barrier "C - D - H" to prevent the ejection of workpieces or tools, or parts of them.
- Protective fence to prevent access to the rear and sides of the machine.
- Gates "F" to have access to the machine side and rear areas.

NOTE: the activation of the emergency push button or the bumpers, will cut power (400 v) to the
machine, apart from some 24VDC powered devices, while the electrical equipment will remain fully
electrically powered.

SMB124
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE OR DISENABLE SAFETY PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY DEVICES
FOR ANY REASON. ALWAYS USE THE DOORS TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE FENCED OFF AREA
AROUND THE SIDES AND BACK MACHINE AND DO NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES
ATTEMPT TO BYPASS THE EMERGENCY SAFETY DEVICES.

PRECAUTION: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO REGULARLY CHECK THAT SAFETY DEVICES


ARE WORKING PROPERLY ESPECIALLY IF THEY ARE NOT OFTEN ACTIVATED.

Fig. 2.1a

Chap. 2 - Pag. 2/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

This machine has been constructed to offer maximum safety, distinguished at the time of its
construction, together with best performance. After a certain period of time (usually every 5 years)
the machine and "state of the art" technology may well have become less safe over time, especially
in terms of safety in the workplace environment if you compare it to current machines. We
therefore recommend that you carry out a series of analyses (requiring the help of the
manufacturer) in order to establish what repairs and updates need to made to the machine
technology. If the machine has been sold to third parties, subcontractors etc. You are required to
inform SCM GROUP of the name and address of the new purchaser so that the machine can always
be traced.

Periodic checking of the functioning of the devices is the task of the production and expert
operator. Any faults must timely be reported to the person in charge.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 3/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
2.1.1 Emergency cable
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1.1)

The machine has an emergency cord-pull switch A (Fig. 2.1.1a).

Behind the machine (inside the protective fences) there is an emergency cord - A1 (fig. 2.1.1b).
A pull of the cord is sufficient to activate the emergency status.

WARNING: before restoring the machine and the CNC from emergency condition, verify that the
cause for the emergency has been resolved.

To reset the machine after an emergency stop, proceed as follows:


- reset the microswitch by pulling push-button B.
- reset the emergency condition by pressing push-button R for at least one second (until it comes on).

IMPORTANT: A CNC reset after an emergency immediately activates the machining unit return
upstroke. Before resetting the CNC after an emergency, visually check that there are no tools
inserted in the workpiece being machined or situations in which lifting the machining unit would
lead to collisions with the workpiece or with machine parts.

To reset the CNC after an emergency stop, to press the function key F10 (of keyboard).

NOTE: with the "OSAI" CNC is before necessary to reset the CNC by F10 key and then pressing R
button

Fig. 2.1.1a

SMB124
WARNING: DO NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES ATTEMPT TO BYPASS THE EMERGENCY
SAFETY DEVICES.

Chap. 2 - Pag. 4/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

2.1.2 Mushroom-head emergency stop push-buttons


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1.2)

The electrical cabinet and mobile control panel have a mushroom-head emergency pushbutton V - V1 :
- To activate the emergency switch, press the pushbutton.

To stop the machine in an immediate danger situation, press one of the red mushroom-headed
pushbuttons situated on the machine near all the work stations

WARNING: before starting to operate the machine you must identify the position of all the
emergency pushbuttons, especially the ones closest to your work station

WARNING: When it is necessary to carry out checks or maintenance on the machine press the
emergency pushbutton V or V1 .

WARNING: before restoring the machine and the CNC from emergency condition, verify that the
cause for the emergency has been resolved.

To reset the machine after an emergency:


- reset push-button V by turning it and reset V1 by pulling it

- reset the emergency condition by pressing push-button R for at least one second (until it comes on).

IMPORTANT: A CNC reset after an emergency immediately activates the machining unit return
upstroke. Before resetting the CNC after an emergency, visually check that there are no tools
inserted in the workpiece being machined or situations in which lifting the machining unit would
lead to collisions with the workpiece or with machine parts.

To reset the CNC after an emergency stop, to press the function key F10 (of keyboard).

NOTE: with the "OSAI" CNC is before necessary to reset the CNC by F10 key and then pressing R
button

Z2 Z
Z3 V
Z4 Y

Z5 X
W A
C B

GENCY ST
ER O JOG + JOG -
EM

F1 F2
ARRET

F3 F4 F5 F6
S
AU

F7
U
D'

RG
T

NO
F8
ENCE

V1 R
V
CMD_02b PIGNA_01b CMD_03d

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 5/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
2.1.3 Machining unit cover
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1.3)

The operator unit guards A block the ejection of material (workpieces or parts of workpieces machined, tools or
parts of tools machining) from the work zone.
On the front cover there is a door L, fitted with an inspection window, which can be opened to check the machining
operations.
Behind the door is the protective device L1 which can be lowered using pin L2.
Under the cover there are oscillating barriers C in PVC which work alongside the panel being processed.

WARNING: Opening the door L activates the emergency state.

To reset the machine from the alarm condition you must:


- reset the microswitches by closing guard L1 and door L
- reset the emergency condition by pressing push-button R for at least one second (until it comes on).

IMPORTANT: A CNC reset after an emergency immediately activates the machining unit return
upstroke. Before resetting the CNC after an emergency, visually check that there are no tools
inserted in the workpiece being machined or situations in which lifting the machining unit would
lead to collisions with the workpiece or with machine parts.

To reset the CNC after an emergency stop, to press the function key F10 (of keyboard).

NOTE: with the "OSAI" CNC is before necessary to reset the CNC by F10 key and then pressing R
button

SMB124
WARNING: DO NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES ATTEMPT TO BYPASS THE EMERGENCY
SAFETY DEVICES.

WARNING: always check the efficiency and good state of the operator unit guards. The integritty of
this device is FUNDAMENTAL for the safety of persons and things.

C
B
B
R
$-UM469
L2 L1 CMD_03d

Fig. 2.1.3a Fig. 2.1.3b

Chap. 2 - Pag. 6/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

2.1.4 Bumpers
(a632_ceb1.0-2.1.4)

On the sides of the total guard there are safety bumpers B (Fig. 2.1.3a). When a person or object knocks the
bumpers, the latter trigger an emergency condition which prevents accidents or damage caused by the collision.
To reset the machine after an emergency condition has been triggered, press pushbutton R .

IMPORTANT: A CNC reset after an emergency immediately activates the machining unit return
upstroke. Before resetting the CNC after an emergency, visually check that there are no tools
inserted in the workpiece being machined or situations in which lifting the machining unit would
lead to collisions with the workpiece or with machine parts.

To reset the CNC after an emergency stop, to press the function key F10 (of keyboard).

NOTE: with the "OSAI" CNC is before necessary to reset the CNC by F10 key and then pressing R
button

SMB124
WARNING: DO NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES ATTEMPT TO BYPASS THE EMERGENCY
SAFETY DEVICES.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 7/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
2.1.5 Perimeter fence
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1.5)

The protective fences are intended to prevent access to the sides and back of the machne.
To have access to this area of the machine, use the door F (fig. 2.1.5a).
It is possible to open/close the doors only by using the safety key micro lock/unlock.

When you need to accede to the interior across the perimetral protections you must:
- unlock, with the F1 key ,the F2 micro-switch on the door to open it.
- Pull out the key from the door and KEEP IT WITH YOU.

The key has to be handled by the personal that accedes to the interior across the protections.
We suggest you this to avoid that somebody,not noticing the eventual presence of personal inside
the protections,closes the doors and re-starts the machine.

Opening a door enables the machine emergency status.

To reset the machine after an emergency:

- MAKE SURE NO ONE IS INSIDE THE FENCES

- close the wicket to reset the micro


- lock the door pulling out the key from the micro.
- reset the emergency condition by pressing push-button R for at least one second (until it comes on).

IMPORTANT: A CNC reset after an emergency immediately activates the machining unit return
upstroke. Before resetting the CNC after an emergency, visually check that there are no tools
inserted in the workpiece being machined or situations in which lifting the machining unit would
lead to collisions with the workpiece or with machine parts.

To reset the CNC after an emergency stop, to press the function key F10 (of keyboard).

NOTE: with the "OSAI" CNC is before necessary to reset the CNC by F10 key and then pressing R
button

SMB124
WARNING: It is strictly prohibited to proceed beyond the perimeter fencing without using the
appropriate door "F".

Chap. 2 - Pag. 8/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

Fig. 2.1.5a

WARNING: always check the efficiency and good state of the perimeter barriers. The integritty of
this device is FUNDAMENTAL for the safety of persons and things.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 9/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 2 - Pag. 10/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 2 - Safety devices

2.1.6 Testing safety devices


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_2.1.6)

Use the following table as support to check the Safety Devices

CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION REF.
DEVICE FREQUENCY MODALITY OF THE
in case of anomaly CHAP.
MACHINE
Pressing the
mushroom-head push-
Switch off the machine, to lock
Mushroom-head buttons the machine is
with padlock the power supply,
emergency stop daily had to arrest in 2.1.1
ON contact the assistance center
push-buttons EMERGENCY.
DON'T USE THE MACHINE
To try all the push
button.
To verify that pusing Switch off the machine, to lock
the bumpers, the with padlock the power supply,
Bumpers to every starting 2.1.3
machine him stops in ON contact the assistance center
Emergency DON'T USE THE MACHINE
Switch off the machine, to lock
To verify the integrity
Perimeter with padlock the power supply,
daily and the good state of 2.1.4
Barriers OFF contact the assistance center
the Perimeter Barriers
DON'T USE THE MACHINE
To verify the integrity
and the good state of
the Operator unit
guards.
Particularly to verify
Switch off the machine, to lock
the perfect integrity of
Operator unit with padlock the power supply,
daily the flexible curtains. 2.1.2
guards OFF contact the assistance center
The transparency of
DON'T USE THE MACHINE
the curtains is index of
their integrity. The
curtains must not have
made yellow (sign of
old age)
To verify the integrity
Pictograms /
and the visibility
safety adhesive weekly To handle their substitution 1.4.2.1
of all the pictograms on OFF
plates
the machine

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 2 - Pag. 11/12
AUTHOR 330
2 - Safety devices EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 2 - Pag. 12/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 3 - Technical Characteristics

INDEX

3.1 General Technical Characteristics.......................................................................3

3.2 Noisiness level.....................................................................................................4

3.3 Overall Dimensions .............................................................................................5

3.4 Working Dimensions............................................................................................6

3.5 Axis Stroke (TV worktable) ..................................................................................7

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 3 - Pag. 1/10
AUTHOR 330
3 - Technical Characteristics EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 3 - Pag. 2/10 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 3 - Technical Characteristics

3.1 General Technical Characteristics


(a330_2.0_ce_bps_3.1)

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


Work surface with 1 panel (Author 330) mm 3050x1000
(1)
(3050x1300 )
"X" - "Y" Axis stroke mm See chap. 3.4
"Z" Axis stroke mm 280
Progammable speed in "X"-axis m/min 40
Progammable speed in "Y"-axis m/min 45
Progammable speed in "Z"-axis m/min 22,5
Vector speed m/min 60
Panel clearance mm See chap. 3.5
Total weight including electrical equipment kg 3300
Sound power according to standards ISO / EN DB See chap. 3.2
(1)
Optional

ELECTRIC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


Motor torque, "X"-axis Nm 5,39
Motor torque, "Y"-axis Nm 5,39
Motor torque, "Z"-axis Nm 5,39
Motor power of 12 / 18 spindles drilling head kW (Hp) 2,2 (3)
Electrospindle power and/or optionals machining units kW (Hp) See specific chap.
Standard power supply V / Hz 400 / 50-60
Rated current in Amps A (2) (3)
30 ÷ 45
(2)
Machine with: Vacuum pump 100mc + 12 sp. Boring head + El.sp. 7,5 KW
(3)
Machine with: Vacuum pump 250mc + 12 sp. Boring head + Dust conveyor + El.sp. 11 KW + Conditioner

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS compressed air supply and extraction


Compressed air supply Bar 6,5
Compressed air consumption Nl/min 450
Diameter of centralised chip extraction conveyor mm 250
Extraction air total consumption m3/h 5400
Air speed for suction m/sec 30
Vacuum Pascal 3000

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 3 - Pag. 3/10
AUTHOR 330
3 - Technical Characteristics EN
3.2 Noisiness level
(a430_ceb4.1-3.2)

LIVELLO DI RUMOROSITÀ
NOISINESS LEVEL
Condizioni di funzionamento: FORATURA - FRESATURA secondo norma : EN 848-3:1999
Operating conditions: BORING - ROUTING Reference standard : EN 848-3:1999
Fattore di FORATURA FRESATURA
BORING ROUTING
Norma di riferimento incertezza
Reference standard K
Uncertainity VSA LAV VSA LAV
factor K
Lop: livello della pressione
acustica al posto operatore
- dB (A) EN ISO 11202:1997 80,2 83,0 72,8 87,2
Noise level at operator position -
dB (A)
Lw: livello della potenza
4
acustica emessa - dB (A) re
1pw EN ISO 3746:1995 97,6 101,2 91,4 107,5
Emitted noise level - dB (A) re
1pw
Il valore massimo della pressione acustica istantanea ponderata è inferiore a 130dB ( C )
The maximum istantaneus noise level pressure is under 130dB ( C )
VSA : A vuoto senza aspirazione LAV : In lavoro
No machinin without dust extractor equipment Machining
Fig. 3.2a

NOTE:

The noise values are emission levels and not necessarily safe working levels.
While there is a correlation between emission levels and exposure levels, this is not a reliable
parameter for determining whether further precautions should be taken.
The factors which influence the real exposure of the operator include the duration of exposure,
environmental features, other sources of emission, e.g. number of machines and other adjacent
machining operations.
The exposure level regulations may vary from country to country.

This information should however make it possible for the machine user to make a better
assessment of the hazards and risks involved.

Chap. 3 - Pag. 4/10 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 3 - Technical Characteristics

3.3 Overall Dimensions


(a330_1.0_ce_bps_3.3)

Figs. 3.3.. shows the overall dimensions of the machine and the points for electrical , compressed air and
vacuum connections ( D ).

Fig. 3.3a

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 3 - Pag. 5/10
AUTHOR 330
3 - Technical Characteristics EN

3.4 Working Dimensions


(a330_2.0_ce_bps_3.4)

The fig. shows the size of the work bench, sizes between the head chucks and minimum and maximum head
positions with respect to the work bench.

"TV" WORK TABLE

3420 (Corsa asse X / X axis stroke)


156,5 3263,5

168
413
1678 (Corsa asse Y / Y axis stroke)

A D
277
93 3050
1265

213,5
1510

PIANO DI LAVORO TV
TV WORKING TABLE
A330_pdl-TV_1,0_CO

Fig. 3.4a

MACHINING UNITS

ER32
94
259

0∞- 90∞
221

245
119

147

63,5 32
46

ER20
32
32
181

160
344,5
393
TFV12m+EM+FDO_A300_01

Fig. 3.4b

Chap. 3 - Pag. 6/10 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 3 - Technical Characteristics

3.5 Axis Stroke (TV worktable)


(a430_top_2.1_ce_bps_3.5-tv)

Fig. 3.5 shows the lengths of tool strokes and the distances between the main operator units and the standard
work surface.

(1)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con punte di foratura
(2)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con elettromandrino e utensile con ingombro di 220mm montato sul magazzino
(3)
Quota minima di sfioramento
(4)
Altezza massima utensile / testina montabile sul magazzino per garantire gli spessori dei pannelli lavorabili (1) (2) -
NOTA: PER LE DIMENSIONI MASSIME DEGLI UTENSILI VEDERE LE TABELLE NEL CAPITOLO
"CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE" DEGLI ELETTROMANDRINI
(5)
Corsa asse "Z" a CNC
(6)
Corsa pneumatica testa di foratura
(7)
Corsa pneumatica mandrini

MAGAZZINO FISSO
FIXED TOOLS CRIB
235
60

153,5
220

(6)

(7)
8(3)

280
(4)

(5)
110(2)

PIANO DI LAVORO TV / TV WORK TABLE


85(1)

Corse_Author300_TV_1

Fig. 3.5a
(1)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with boring bits
(2)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with electrospindle and 220mm tool installed on the tool-room
(3)
Touching minimum quote
(4)
Tool max height / head that can be installed in the tool-room to guarantee the thickness of the working panels
(1)(2)
- WARNING: FOR THE MAX DIMENSIONS OF THE TOOLS SEE THE TABLES IN THE "TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS" OF THE ELECTROSPINDLES CHAPTER
(5)
Numerical control axis Z stroke
(6)
Boring head pneumatical stroke
(7)
Spindles pneumatical stroke

NOTE: measures refer to fully uplifted "Z" axis

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 3 - Pag. 7/10
AUTHOR 330
3 - Technical Characteristics EN

(1)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con punte di foratura
(2)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con elettromandrino e utensile con ingombro di 220mm montato sul magazzino
(3)
Quota minima di sfioramento
(4)
Altezza massima utensile / testina montabile sul magazzino per garantire gli spessori dei pannelli lavorabili (1) (2) -
NOTA: PER LE DIMENSIONI MASSIME DEGLI UTENSILI VEDERE LE TABELLE NEL CAPITOLO
"CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE" DEGLI ELETTROMANDRINI

Y
Y
X
X
0∞- 90∞

MAGAZZINO FISSO
FIXED TOOLS CRIB
ø160
ø200

235
235
220
8(3)

(4)

35

70
110(2)

PIANO DI LAVORO TV / TV WORK TABLE


85(1)

118

Corse_Author300_TV_3

Fig. 3.5b
(1)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with boring bits
(2)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with electrospindle and 220mm tool installed on the tool-room
(3)
Touching minimum quote
(4)
Tool max height / head that can be installed in the tool-room to guarantee the thickness of the working panels
(1)(2)
- WARNING: FOR THE MAX DIMENSIONS OF THE TOOLS SEE THE TABLES IN THE "TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS" OF THE ELECTROSPINDLES CHAPTER

NOTE: measures refer to fully uplifted "Z" axis

Chap. 3 - Pag. 8/10 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 3 - Technical Characteristics

(1)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con punte di foratura
(2)
Massimo spessore pannello lavorazione con elettromandrino e utensile con ingombro di 220mm montato sul magazzino
(3)
Quota minima di sfioramento
(4)
Altezza massima utensile / testina montabile sul magazzino per garantire gli spessori dei pannelli lavorabili (1) (2) -

(5) (5) (5)


MAGAZZINO FISSO
FIXED TOOLS CRIB
A B C D

60

200
220

160

230
ø120
259
220

293
8(3)

104
(4)

75
110(2)
85(1)

PIANO DI LAVORO TV / TV WORK TABLE

(5)
AVVERTENZE: CON LE TESTINE "B" - "C" - "D" MONTATE
SUL MAGAZZINO, LO SPESSORE DEL PANNELLO
LAVORABILE DIMINUISCE DI CONSEGUENZA

Corse_Author300_TV_3

Fig. 3.5c
(1)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with boring bits
(2)
Maximum thickness of the working panel with electrospindle and 220mm tool installed on the tool-room
(3)
Touching minimum quote
(4)
Tool max height / head that can be installed in the tool-room to guarantee the thickness of the working panels
(5)
WARNING: THE B - C - D HEADS, INSTALLED ON THE TOOL-ROOM, REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE
WORKING PANEL

NOTE: measures refer to fully uplifted "Z" axis

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 3 - Pag. 9/10
AUTHOR 330
3 - Technical Characteristics EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 3 - Pag. 10/10 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

INDEX

4.1 Handling ..............................................................................................................2

4.1.1 Packing / Storage ................................................................................................4

4.1.2 Handling the machine after installation................................................................5

4.1.3 Cleaning the machine on receipt .........................................................................6

4.2 Positioning ...........................................................................................................7

4.3 Installing the Machine..........................................................................................8

4.4 Removing the securing blocks and brackets .......................................................9

4.5 Assembling the dismantled parts.......................................................................10

4.5.1 Fitting the Protective Fences .............................................................................11

4.5.2 Connecting up the Vacuum Pump.....................................................................14

4.6 Levelling ............................................................................................................15

4.6.1 Anchoring ..........................................................................................................15

4.7 Electrical Connections .......................................................................................16

4.8 Pneumatic Connections.....................................................................................19

4.9 Connections to the Chips Vacuum System .......................................................20

4.9.1 Connection to the centralised sawdust/shavings extractor (Optional)...............22

4.9.2 Dust extraction conveyor (Optional) ..................................................................23

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 1/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.1 Handling
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_4.1)

The machine must only be handled by qualified personnel


Before hoisting the machine remove all packaging material and components which were
ATTACHED to the machine during transport. Check component weight before hoisting; component
weight is shown on the plate (T1).

To handle the machine, use a crane or a bridge crane


ensuring that the capacity of the lifting means is greater than the weight of the machine.

The weight of the machine is indicated on the metal identification plate on the frame (see chap. 1.1).

WARNING: It is forbidden to lift the machine with ropes, chains.


- When positioning the machine, avoid sudden, sharp movements.
- Check that the floor is type industrial, solid, stable, flat and made of cement: other types of floors are not
recommended

Ensure that the load-bearing capacity of the floor is greater than the weight of the machine (see
chap. 4.2)

-
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_4.1a)

Before hoisting the machine remove all packaging material and components which
were ATTACHED to the machine during transport. Check component weight before T1
hoisting; component weight is shown on the plate (T1).

Targhe_peso

-
(a330_1.0_ce_bps_4.1a)

To handle the machine, use a crane or a bridge crane


Avoid sudden hoisting movements. Great care must be taken to avoid brusque movements which might tip the
machine dangerously.

SMB124
No persons and things must be present in the area during the unloading and moving operations

Move the machine to its location.

The unpacking and installation operations must be carried out by personnel authorised by SCM
Group S.p.A. . Once the machine has been unloaded and placed, wait for authorised personnel.

Chap. 4 - Pag. 2/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

Take the pallet off the machine


Lift the machine only by the appropriate lifting bracket A .

$-UM543d

Once the machine is installed, keep all devices used for transportation (belts, brackets, etc...) for
any future movements

. -
(unix-kbt_1.0_ce_4.1a)

WARNING: It is forbidden to lift the machine with ropes, chains or forklift truck.

$-UM159c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 3/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN
-
(a330_1.0_ce_bps_4.1b_inp)

To move the machine without using hoisting equipment, position the special trolleys C (fig. 4.1c) at the points
indicated in the diagram.
Check that lifting capacity of the trolleys is sufficient to take the weight of the machine.

$-UM476d

Fig. 4.1c

4.1.1 Packing / Storage


(a744_2.0_ce_bps_4.1.1)

Foreword:
On machines all moving parts are locked and all dismantled parts are fixed to the machine body, to the pallet (if
used) or packed separately (e.g.: perimeter fence).

The type of machine packaging depends on the model, the means of transport used and the destination:
- Heat-sealed covering canvas
- Pallet
- Crate

For instruction on cleaning off protective coatings, see section 4.1.3.

Unpacking:
- Support the cover A (Fig. 4.1.1a) as shown in detail A1
- Lift off the cover and then dismantle the sides (wooden cases and crates). Proceed gradually and carefully. Make
sure the crate or case sides are adequately supported while you are removing the fixings which hold them
together.
- Undo the four nuts C completely and release the base B.
- Lift the machine (refer to section 4.1) and remove the wooden base).
- Release all the parts to be assembled.

Chap. 4 - Pag. 4/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

A A1

B
B
$-UM58b

Fig. 4.1.1a

CAUTION: The packaging of the machine is directed only to its transport.


The possible warehousing has to be arranged in closed and dry places.
Control that, during the transportation, the machine is not damaged in the packaging coverings
and that there have been no water infiltration. In this case the solution is to remove the packaging
from the machine, dry carefully the wet parts and use a cloth lightly impregnated with neutral oil on
the steel parts.

4.1.2 Handling the machine after installation


(a632_ceb1.0-4.1.2)

To move the machine after it has been installed, follow the procedure described in section 4.4 in reverse.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 5/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.1.3 Cleaning the machine on receipt


(a632_ceb1.0-4.1.3_pag-succ)

Before packaging, the machine is given a protective treatment using rust-proofing products. When the machine is
unpacked, these products must be removed with the aid of suitable degreasers which do not damage metal and
plastic parts on the machine. In particular, all sliding parts and machining units must be carefully cleaned.

SMB124
IMPORTANT: Never use solvents, especially flammable types (benzene, diesel, kerosene, etc.).

Take special care to prevent liquids entering the motors.

When you have completed cleaning, dry the parts with a clean cloth
a cloth dampened with neutral oil is suggested for the steel parts.

Chap. 4 - Pag. 6/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.2 Positioning
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_4.2)

Place the machine in the best, well-aired and well-lit position (at least 500 Lux), which must be convenient for
connection to the electrical, compressed air and chipping extraction systems.
Leave enough space around the machine to allow easy maintenance.

PRECAUTIONS:
The ground has to be di industrial type, stable and it has not to transmit vibrations of other
machines.
The ground has to be able to guarantee a 2500 kg/m2 (2500 kg/m2) overload and it has to be realized
with 250RBK concrete, 25 N/mm2hardness. If this condition is not satisfied, a foundation has to be
foreseen: THE DIAGRAM IN FIG. 4.2a HAS TO BE CONSIDERED AS AN EXAMPLE.
The machine weight has to be evenly distributed on all feets .
INSTALLATIONS ON UPPER FLOORS ARE FORBIDDEN: UPPER FLOORS, BY THEIR NATURE,
ARE FLEXIBLE AND TRANSMIT VIBRATIONS.

40
8
300

C B
100

7200
D

D
1300

200

C
200
$-UM321

Fig. 4.2a

A) Poor concrete batched at 200 kg/m3


B) RBK 25 N/mm2 concrete reinforced with FeB32K steel
C) Net realized with FeB32K steel round, 8mm diameter or equivalent electrically welded wire net
D) Polystyrene 40mm thickness or equivalent insulating material

To ensure maximum structural stability and stiffness, the machine must be anchored to the floor. Anchoring to the
floor is also recommended to ensure that the machine remains level for a long time after installation.
Next to the floor plates there are fixing holes for anchor bolts or expansion bolts.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 7/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.3 Installing the Machine


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_4.3)

PRECAUTIONS
- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel
authorised by the manufacturer

- The machine must only be handled by qualified personnel

NOTE: Study the present use and maintenance manual before carrying out any operations on the
machine

- Always check that the equipment to be used is in proper working order.


- Pay careful attention to adhesive labels (yellow=danger warning; blue=caution warning): they
remind you how operations should be carried out, warn you of danger and prevent hazardous
situations arising out of incorrect operations.

SMB124
The machine must not be run in environments classified as potentially explosive in compliance
with standard "94/9/CE".

The machine is designed for use indoors in industrial environments.


Operating conditions for the machine are as follows:

- Humidity: 90% (max.)


- Temperature: min. + 10°C ; Max + 35°C
- Altitude: 1500m asl (maximum; for higher altitudes, consult the manufacturer)

Chap. 4 - Pag. 8/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.4 Removing the securing blocks and brackets


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_4.4)

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

For greater security during transport the electrical cabinet and the tool carriages are fastened to the machine body
using blocks and brackets.
After positioning the machine on the work location, these blocks and brackets should be removed as follows:
- To support the electrical cabinet use rope or lifting chains connecting them to the eyebolts D (Fig. 4.4a).
- Position the electrical cabinet at the desired location and remove the brackets B - C .
- Remove the securing brackets A - E - F

Fig. 4.4a

Check that all securing blocks, marked by the plate in figure 4.4b, have been removed
Check that all securing blocks have been removed by pushing the bore unit by hand in the X and Y
directions.

TOGLIERE PRIMA DI METTERE IN


FUNZIONE LA MACCHINA
TO TAKE OUT BEFORE PUT
THE MACHINE INTO FUNCTION
Fig. 4.4b

Do not start up the machine before carryng out this operation.


Once the machine is installed, keep all devices used for transportation (belts, brackets, etc...) for
any future movements

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 9/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.5 Assembling the dismantled parts


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_4.5)

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

Considering the machine dimensions, the means of transport and the kind of packaging, some parts of the
machine can be removed.

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

Installation of disassembled parts includes:


- positioning the electrical cabinet A
- the collector's assemblage for the centralized dust extraction system B (if present)
- the installation of C pneumatic cylinder and of D cables-holder chain for Z axis handling
- the installation of E cables-holder chain for X axis handling
- fitting the emergency cable G
- the covering installation with H bumpers
- the positioning and connection of L vacuum pump
- the installation of M rear tools-holder crib (if present)
- fitting the perimeter fence N

Fig. 4.5a

Chap. 4 - Pag. 10/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.5.1 Fitting the Protective Fences


(a330_1.0_ce_ftc_4.5.1)

The manufacturer supplys a protective fence preventing access to the sides and the back of the machine.
Assemble the protections following the figures and the scheme of fig. 4.5.1e

When you have completely assembled the fencing fix it to the floor with expansion plugs, inserting them in the
holes A .

Plug the microswitch R connector R1 into the socket R2 .

IMPORTANT: Check correct operation: opening the door must trigger an emergency state.

A
$-UM544h

Fig. 4.5.1a

A
A
$-UM544a

Fig. 4.5.1b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 11/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

R1
R2

NO
I

FFO O
A

$-UM544c Author_430-top_AL8080_05

Fig. 4.5.1c Fig. 4.5.1d

Chap. 4 - Pag. 12/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

-
(a330_1.0_ce_bps_4.5.1a)

Montaggio porta a destra: a richiesta


Assemblage of the door to the right: to request E
960 960 960 960 960 960 660

E
1010

960
960
960
594 400

960
85
S

S
Author_330_BPS_01

Fig. 4.5.1d

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 13/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.5.2 Connecting up the Vacuum Pump


(a330_1.0_ce_ftc_4.5.2)

To prevent even the smallest vibrations on the machine, the vacuum pump is supplied separately. To connect up
the vacuum pump, proceed as follows:

- Place the vacuum pump at the back of the machine.


- Connect up the hose C and fix it in position with the clips provided (Fig. 4.5.2a).
- Connect the connector A and lock it in position with the clip B.

NO
I

FFO O
Author_430-top_AL8080_05a

Fig. 4.5.2a Fig. 4.5.2b

Chap. 4 - Pag. 14/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.6 Levelling
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_4.6)

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

For correct levelling, use:


- a precision level
- a perfectly straight and smooth levelling bar at least 850mm long
- a 16 mm open-ended spanner
- a 30 mm open-ended spanner

Place the bar B across the X-axis drive guides C and place level A (fig. 4.6a) on the bar B.
To adjust the level, operate on the nuts D and, after adjusting tighten the nuts E.

B A
C

F
E
D
$-UM511

Fig. 4.6a

NOTE: perfect levelling is obtained by trial and error, moving the levelling bar across and
lengthways.
The maximum difference in level along the X-axis is 0.1mm/m
The maximum difference in level along the Y-axis is 0.1mm/m

To maintain constant precision during machining, the manufacturer recommends that you carry
out a periodic (at least annual) control of machine levelling and, if necessary, perform levelling
again.

4.6.1 Anchoring
(a632_ceb1.0-4.6.1)

To ensure maximum structural stability and stiffness, the machine must be anchored to the floor.
Anchoring to the floor is also recommended to ensure that the machine remains level for a long time after
installation.
Next to the floor plates there are fixing holes for anchor bolts or expansion bolts.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 15/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.7 Electrical Connections


(a327_1.0_ce_bps_4.7)

IMPORTANT:
- The machine must only be connected up by a qualified electrician.
- Check that the voltage of your mains power supply matches that of the machine +/-10% [V400 (V360 <->
V440) 50/60Hz]
- Check that your electrical line equipment is suitable for machine power supply requirements (refer to
Table in Fig. 4.7a)

AMPERE ASSORBITI SEZIONE CAVI FUSIBILI AM


ELECTRICAL INPUT (AMPERE) CABLE SECTION AM FUSE
AMPERES ABSORBES SECTION CABLE FUSIBLE AM
STROMAUFNAHME (AMPERE) KABELQUERSCHNITT SICHERUNGEN A
AMPERE ABSORBIDOS SECCION CABLES FUSIBLES AM
AMPERE ΑΠΟΡΡΟΦΗΘΕΝΤΑ ΙΑΤΟΜΗ ΚΑΛΩ∆ΙΩΝ ΑΣΦΑΛΕΙΕΣ
(ΕΥΤΗΚΤΑ) ΑΜ
A mm 2
A AM SCM GROUP spa
Str. Montefeltro, 81/3
---> 10 2,5 12 I - 61100 Pesaro (PU) - ITALY

10 ---> 14 4,0 16
MARCA
MAKE
TIPO ANNO
14 ---> 18 6,0 20
TYPE
N|B SERIE
SERIAL N|B
YEAR
Kg

18 ---> 22 6,0 25 Un V In A F Hz

I cc kA w.d.
22 ---> 28 10,0 32 MOD. REF.

28 ---> 36 10,0 40 COMP.

36 ---> 46 16,0 50
46 ---> 54 16,0 63
54 ---> 76 25,0 80
76 ---> 92

TRG_46e
35,0 100
92 ---> 110 50,0 125
$-UM202
Trg_46e

Fig. 4.7a Fig. 4.7b

NOTE: The table in Fig. 4.7a applies to cables up to 100m long connecting the main line directly to
the electrical cabinet.
Voltage (Volt) and current (I=ampere) are marked on the rating plate A (Fig. 4.7b)
If the power supply is connected through a transformer, refer to the rating plate of the transformer.

NOTE: Fit a safety device upstream of the machine in conformity with the wiring diagram
specifications: a circuit breaker or delayed fuse, as indicated in the attached table.
Fit a cut-out switch upstream of the machine, in conformity with the laws and standards in force in
the country in which the machine is used. The switch must be tripped at 300 mA, co-ordinating
with the facility earth circuit.

NOTE: if the customer runs the electrical power down from above, do not pass the power leads
close to the monitor and PC.
Do not use the electrical cabinet supply walls as a support for fixing power leads.

Chap. 4 - Pag. 16/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

Connect the machine to your mains power supply as follows:

- Turn the main switch B (fig. 4.7c).


- Using the key supplied C, open the door of the electrical cabinet.
- Feed the power supply cable through the hole F.
- Connect the three wires of the power supply cable to the terminals D.
- Connect the neutral wire to terminal N
- Connect the yellow-green earth cable to the terminal E.
- Start the machine (see section 6.2.1) and check the direction of rotation of spindle no.1. The spindle must rotate
in a clockwise direction.
(The thread direction of the tool mounted on the machine defines the rotation direction of the spindle: right thread =
right spindle rotation; left thread = left spindle rotation.)
- If the spindle do not rotate in the correct direction, invert two of the three wires on the terminals D.

B
N
IO
O OFF

O
OFF C

NO
I

D
FFO O

N E

Author_430-top_AL8080_06

Fig. 4.7c

NOTE: Check if the following electrical connections have been made:


- entrance doors for perimeter fence

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 17/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN
.
(sp2)

Chap. 4 - Pag. 18/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.8 Pneumatic Connections


(tz25_ce_1.0-4.8)

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

IMPORTANT:
Make sure that:
- the compressed air supply equipment is free from condensation and deposits (emulsified oil,
scaling).
- the compressed air supply pressure is at least 7 bar.
- that the hoses and piping of the compressed air secondary distribution network have a diameter
of 3/4" gas (approx. 27 mm).
- In particular, the compressed air generating system must provide the following air quality
characteristics*:
- MAX. particle dimensions = 40 microns
- Max. oil content = 25mg/m3
- Dew point = + 2°C

*If you have any questions, please contact the compressed air generating system manufacturer.

Pneumatic connections should be made as follows:

- Connect the air hose A (Fig. 4.8a) to the 14 mm diam. connector B of the filter unit.
- Fix the hose in place using a Jubilee clip C.
- To adjust the compressed air pressure, lift and rotate the knob D to obtain the setting required. Read off the air
pressure on the pressure gauge E. The recommended working pressure for this machine is 6,5 bar.
- Press down the knob D to lock it in position.

C A
L

E
B

$-UM525a $-UM175a

Fig. 4.8a Fig. 4.8b

To charge/discharge the compressed air circuit, proceed as follows:

- Press the knob L (Fig. 4.8b) down fully and rotate to switch on the compressed air supply to the machine.
- To switch off the compressed air supply and discharge the air from the machine circuit, turn the knob L; the knob
can be padlocked in this position.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 19/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.9 Connections to the Chips Vacuum System


(a355_1.0_ce_bps_4.9)

- Installation operations must be carried out by specialised SCM technicians or personnel


authorised by the manufacturer

The machine must be connected to the extraction system, which must be constructed in
compliance with pr EN 12779 regulations which also require the use of primer sources detector.
Any plastic hoses used must be fireproof

Correct extraction gives efficient machine operation and prevents damage caused by overheating. It also reduces
the risk of inhaling sawdust and guarantees safe machining conditions for the operator.
Once a week, check the efficiency of the sawdust/shaving extractor system.

Other factors which reduce sawdust emissions are:


-regular maintenance of the tools, the machine and the extractor system
-correct cutting speed and feed speed
-correct adjustment of hoods, guards, diverters

Always machine with the general extraction functioning also when machining single workpieces.

WARNING:
Ensure that the dust extraction system has the following features that have to be guaranteed in G
connection points:
- dust extraction speed = 30m/s
- extraction air consumption (capacity) = sum of singles conveyors (m3/h)
- vacuum = 3000Pa

Connect a hose 150mm in diameter from the vacuum system to the manifold G (boring head) and fix it in place with
a Jubilee clip (Fig. 4.9a): air consumption for suction = 1900m3/h

Connect a hose 150 mm in diameter from the vacuum system to the manifold G1 (Electric spindle - Optional) and
fix it in place with a Jubilee clip : air consumption for suction = 1900m3/h.

Connect a tube 150mm in diameter from the extraction system to the collector G2 (optional front/back units) and
close by a metallic strip: extracted air consumption = 1900 [cubic]h.

Chap. 4 - Pag. 20/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

G1

G2

$-UM_522
OK
$-UM56b

Fig. 4.9a Fig. 4.9e

IMPORTANT: Ensure that there are no kinks or sharp bends in the extractor hose. Sharp bends will
cause a build up of wood shavings in the bend and restrict the extraction flow (See Fig. 4.9e)

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 21/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN

4.9.1 Connection to the centralised sawdust/shavings extractor


(Optional)
(a632_ceb1.0-4.9.1)

The centralised suction device requires a flexible tube of 300 mm or 250 mm diameter to connect it to the main
waste extraction system: our technician will cut the manifold to size if a 250 mm tube is preferred.

IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the vacuum system has the following characteristics:
- air speed for suction = 30m/s
- air consumption for suction = 7500* / 5400**m3/h
- vacuum = 3000Pa

Connect a hose 300* / 250**mm in diameter from the vacuum system to the manifold G3 (Fig. 4.9.1a) and fix it in
place with a Jubilee clip.

G3

OK
$-UM286a $-UM56b

Fig. 4.9.1a Fig. 4.9.1b

IMPORTANT: Ensure that there are no kinks or sharp bends in the extractor hose. Sharp bends will
cause a build up of wood shavings in the bend and restrict the extraction flow (See Fig. 4.9.1b)

Chap. 4 - Pag. 22/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 4 - Transport and machine installation

4.9.2 Dust extraction conveyor (Optional)


(a327_1.0_ce_bps_4.9.2)

On demand it's possible to have a chips conveyor installed under the working table.
The conveyor is moved by A selector (see fig. 4.9.2a).
The customer has to prepare in the conveyor unloading area a case to collect chips.

Fig. 4.9.2a

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 4 - Pag. 23/24
AUTHOR 330
4 - Transport and machine installation EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 4 - Pag. 24/24 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

INDEX

5.1 Controls general description................................................................................2

5.1.1 Mobile push-button control panel: precautions for use........................................3

5.2 Main Control Panel ..............................................................................................4

5.3 Remote push button control panel.......................................................................6

5.4 Controls on working tables ..................................................................................9

5.5 Software push button panel (Paddle screen) ....................................................12

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 1/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN

5.1 Controls general description


(a327_1.0_ce_bps_5.1)

The controls of the machine are placed on (see pic. 5.1a):

- Electrical cabinet A
- Remote push button panel B (also called "remote control")
- Working tables C
- Consolle D (also called "remote push button panel")

Depending on the type of electrical cabinet and the machine configuration the commands
described here may not be present.

Fig. 5.1a

Chap. 5 - Pag. 2/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

5.1.1 Mobile push-button control panel: precautions for use


(a-x5e_44_3.0_cebpsnew_5.1.1)

The back of the mobile push-button control panel has a magnetic support so that it can easily be attached on metal
parts of the machine, freeing up the operator's hands to make work easier .

Do not attach the mobile push-button control panel at heights above approx. 1.2 m. The control
panel could be damaged by an accidental fall from a height greater than that indicated .

If the push-button control panel accidentally falls (from any height), always check that there is no damage to the
controls before using the machine.

In particular, check:
- that the mushroom-head EMERGENCY STOP push-button works ( A ). See also in Chapter 2 the section
on "Checking safety devices");
- the axis selector ( B );
- the spindle potentiometer ( C );
- the axis potentiometer ( D );

OK
C
D
B

MA A
1,2 X
m

Pigna_03a Pigna_03b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 3/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN

5.2 Main Control Panel


(a-x5b_1.0_ce_fot_5.2)

On the electrical cabinet there is a series of push buttons, fixed selectors and a remote push button panel, also
called "remote control" (see pic. 5.3).

Depending on the type of electrical cabinet and the machine configuration the commands
described here may not be present.

Ref. Picture Description / Function Use and / or indication

General switch /
N
IO
O OFF

OFF = disconnected
It inserts / disconnects the electrical
1 tension of general feeding.
It can be blocked in "O-OFF" position ON = inserted
through a padlock.
O
OFF

Emergency push-button /
Push to disconnect the
tension.
When always active it is used for
2 immediately blocking all the machine
Rotate in the direction of
functions by cancelling the machining
the arrow, in order to
cycle, stopping the axis and the
restore the button
spindles rotation
White shining RESET push-button /
Push to insert
When switched on, it shows that the Switched on pilot light =
machine is active, ready for workings. electrical tension
3 When switched off it shows that the WARNING: IN CASE OF
machine is in emergency. LAMP MALFUNCTION,
CMD_03b
After having restored the emergencies, REPLACE IT
it is used to reactivate the machine (it IMMEDIATELY!
has to light up by pushing it)
NORMAL STOP push-button /

0 When always active it is used for


Push to disconnect the
4 immediately blocking all the machine
tension.
functions by cancelling the machining
CMD_03p
cycle, stopping the axis and the
spindles rotation

2-positions select /
0 = disconnected
5
O I

It is used for activating/deactivating the


I = inserted
CMD_05
vacuum pump

Chap. 5 - Pag. 4/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

2-positions selector /
O = disconnected
5
O I

It is used for activating/deactivating the


I = inserted
CMD_06
chips conveyor (optional)

2-positions select /
0 = disconnected
7
O I
It is used for activating/deactivating the
devices for the pieces pushing I = inserted
CMD_07
(optional)
0 = disconnected
3-positions selector /
I = Inserted for the
8
I 0 II
It is used for activating/deactivating the standard machining
lifting devices with multifunctional
CMD_06
vacuum cups or jigs (optional) II = Inserted for the
machining with jigs

2-positions select /
0 = disconnected
9
0 I

It is used for activating / deactivating


I = inserted
CMD_09
the lifting devices (optional)

A-B 2-positions selector /


O = machining with
vacuum cups
10
O I
It is used for activating / deactivating
the machinings with clamps of piece
I = machining with clamps
CMD_08 blocking (Optional)
2-positions selector / tables positioning in
0 I
manual modality
11 It is used for selecting the functioning
modality of the working tables CN tables positioning in
CMD_09
(Optional) automatic modality
0 = single management of
A-B 2-positions selector /
I-J the working areas
12
0 1
It is used for selecting the functioning
I = double management of
modality of the working tables TWIN
the working areas (Twin
(optional)
modality)
CMD_10

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 5/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN

5.3 Remote push button control panel


(a632_ceb1.0-5.3)

NOTE: The push button panel needs to be always correctly held: an improper way of usage may
cause the interruption of the connections or even damage some of the components.

Ref. Picture Description / Function Use and / or indication

Potentiometer of speed adjusting of


20 axis in machining
CMD_20

Potentiometer of speed adjusting of


21 axis in manual modality
CMD_21

Z3
Z2 Z
V
Selector "Axis" /
22
4
Z Y

Z5
W A
X
It is used for selecting the axis with the
CNC in "manual" or "MDI" modality
C B
CMD_22

"Start cycle" push-button /

It is used for restarting the machining


cycle after a "hold" generated by the The switched on pilot light
23 push-button 24 and it is active only with shows that the button is
CMD_23
the CNC in "Automatic" modality; it is active
also used for confirming the instructions
or the controls inserted through the
software interface.
"Stop cycle" push-button /

It is used for temporarily blocking (hold


modality) the machining cycle, by The switched on pilot light
24 stopping the axis and the shows that the button is
CMD_24
electrospindles rotation and it is only active
active with the CNC in "Automatic"
modality (push the button 23 in order to
restart the cycle)
Push-button (+) for the axis movement
in manual modality /
25 JOG +
It is used for moving the axis in positive
CMD_25

direction with the CNC in "MDI"


modality

Chap. 5 - Pag. 6/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

Push-button (-) for the axis movement


in manual modality /
26 JOG -
it is used for moving the axis in
CMD_26

negative direction with the CNC in


"MDI" modality
Push-button for the blocking/relase of The switched on pilot light
27 the cone ISO30 / HSK63: active in shows that the button is
CMD_27
"Automatic" and "MDI" modalities active
Push-button (F1) for the confirmation of
28 F1 the tools loading / unloading: active in
CMD_28
"Autmatic" and "MDI" modalities

29 F2 Push-button not enabled


CMD_29

Push-button for the manual lifting of the


extraction hood /
30 It is used for lifting or for manually
CMD_30

lowering the extraction hood and it is


always active.
Push-button (F3) for the manual lifting
31 F3 of the stops, active in every conditions,
CMD_31
except the "Automatic" modality

32 F4 Push-button not enabled


CMD_32

33 F5 Push-button not enabled


CMD_33

Push-button (F6) for the rotation of the


34 F6 tool crib: active in "Manual" or "MDI"
CMD_34
modality

F7
35 F8 Selector not enabled

CMD_35

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 7/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN

On the position (No


edit) the editing on the
CNC is blocked, so that it
3-positions selector for "No edit" - "No
is impossible to carry on
mode" /
36 the data saving.

CMD_36
Always active On the position (No
mode) the machine
functions before enabled
are stored.
Emergency push-button
Push to disconnect the
When always active, it is used for tension.
37 immediately blocking all the machine
functions, by cancelling the machining Pull to restore the push-
cycle, stopping the axis and the button
spindles rotation

Z3
Z2 Z
V
In order to move the axis
in "adjustment" modality,
Z4 Y

Z5 X
W A
C B

you need to keep the


Push-button for the axis movement in
38 push-button S2 pushed;
JOG + JOG -

38 "adjustment" modality
F1 F2

F3 F4 F5 F6
its release during the
moving of the axis creates
F7
F8

37 the machine emergency


PIGNA_01a

Chap. 5 - Pag. 8/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

5.4 Controls on working tables


(a632_ceb1.0-5.4+pag-note)

Depending on the type of electrical cabinet and the machine configuration the commands
described here may not be present.

Ref. Picture Description / Function Use and / or indication

A
I
E
White push-button /
40 They order the cycle start (a push-
button each working area)
CMD_40

Foot start push-button (optional) /


40a They order the cycle start (a push-
CM
D_4
0b
button each working area)

A 3-positions selector /
41 It activates / disconnects the vacuum in
CMD_41
the working tables / vacuum cups

In position >|< it lowers


the vacuum cup and it
2-positions selector /
blocks it
42 It orders the multifunctional vacuum
In position <= => it
cups
CMD_42
releases the vacuum cup
and it lifts it
It activates/deactivates in
a sequential way the
following
Black multifunctional push-button
43 (optional)
functions/devices:
1) vacuum in the working
CMD_43

areas / vacuum cups


2) lifting devices (optional)
The switched on selector
shows that the clamps
6 bar 3-positions selector (machinings with work in high pressure and
clamps - optional) / the CN allows the
44 machining.
It is used for blocking the piece in high
CMD_44
pressure With the switched off
selector the CN doesn't
allow the machining

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 9/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN
1 bar
3-positions selector (machinings with
Active only with the
clamps - optional)/
switched off selector "44"
45
A

and the selector "10" in


It is used for opening the front and the
position "I"
CMD_45
back clamps at the same time
1 bar
3-positions selector (machinings with
Active only with the
clamps - optional) /
switched off selector "44"
46
1

and the selector "10" in


It is used for the individual blocking in
position "I"
CMD_46
"low pressure" of the clamps
- in position the
working tables and the
2-positions selector (with working tables
vacuum cups can be
CN - optional) /
0 I manually positioned;
47 - in position the working
It is used for the selection of the
tables and the vacuum
machining modality.
cups are managed by the
CMD_47

CNC

SET UP
Black push-button (with working tables
PLANE CN - optional) /
Active with the selector
48 "47" in position
It is used for the selection of the
CMD_48 machining modality
3-way pneumatic vacuum cup /
49 CM
D_
49

It is used for the enabling of the double


row of the end stops (optional)
2-way pneumatic vacuum cup (working
tables TV-Morbidelli-optional)
50 CM
D_
50

It is used for the blocking/release of the


vacuum cups

Chap. 5 - Pag. 10/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 11/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN

5.5 Software push button panel (Paddle screen)


(puls_softw)

The software push button panel is activated only from "Panel Mac" in three different way:
- click on the icon A (fig. 5.5a)
- Commands menu --> Paddle (fig. 5.5b)
- press the keys Alt+F9

Fig. 5.5a Fig. 5.5b

The machine can have two different software push button panels because of the presence or less
of the mobile remote control.

Commands description:
- all the push buttons are unstable and luminous, except the axes selection push buttons
- the black selectors are stable
- the key selectors are stable and protected by password

To operate the push buttons and selectors it is necessary to point and to click with the mouse
To operate the speed axes regulators it is necessary to drag the cursor with the mouse

Fig. 5.5d Fig. 5.5e

Chap. 5 - Pag. 12/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

Ref. Picture Description / Function Use and / or indication

2-positions select /
0 = disconnected
5
O I

It is used for activating/deactivating the


I = inserted
CMD_05
vacuum pump

2-positions selector /
O = disconnected
5
O I

It is used for activating/deactivating the


I = inserted
CMD_06
chips conveyor (optional)

2-position selector /
8
0 I

It is used for activating/deactivating the


CMD_09a
lifting devices (optional)

Potentiometer of speed adjusting of


20 axis in machining
CMD_20a

Potentiometer of speed adjusting of


21 axis in manual modality
CMD_21a

X "X" axis selection push button /


22c It is used to select the axis with the
CMD_22c
CNC in "manual" or "MDI" modality

Y "Y" axis selection push button /


22d It is used to select the axis with the
CMD_22d
CNC in "manual" or "MDI" modality

Z Push button to "Z" axis selection /


22e It is used for selecting the axis with the
CMD_22e
CNC in "manual" or "MDI" modality

A Push button to "A" axis selection /


22f It is used for selecting the axis with the
CMD_22f
CNC in "manual" or "MDI" modality

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 13/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN
"Start cycle" push-button /

It is used for restarting the machining


cycle after a "hold" generated by the
23 push-button 24 and it is active only with
the CNC in "Automatic" modality; it is
CMD_03c
also used for confirming the instructions
or the controls inserted through the
software interface.
"Stop cycle" push-button /

It is used for temporarily blocking (hold


modality) the machining cycle, by
24 stopping the axis and the
electrospindles rotation and it is only
CMD_24a active with the CNC in "Automatic"
modality (push the button 23 in order to
restart the cycle)
Push-button (+) for the axis movement
in manual modality /
25 It is used for moving the axis in positive
direction with the CNC in "MDI"
modality
CMD_25a

Push-button (-) for the axis movement


in manual modality /
26 it is used for moving the axis in
negative direction with the CNC in
"MDI" modality
CMD_26a

F1 Push-button (F1) for the confirmation of


28 the tools loading / unloading: active in
"Autmatic" and "MDI" modalities
CMD_28a

Push-button for the manual lifting of the


extraction hood /
30 It is used for lifting or for manually
lowering the extraction hood and it is
always active.
CMD_30a

On the position (No


Selector / edit) the editing on the
36a
O I
CNC is blocked, so that it
Always active is impossible to carry on
the data saving.
CMD_36a

Chap. 5 - Pag. 14/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 5 - Controls general description

Selector / On the position (No


36b
O I
mode) the machine
Always active functions before enabled
CMD_36b
are stored.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 5 - Pag. 15/16
AUTHOR 330
5 - Controls general description EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 5 - Pag. 16/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

INDEX

6.1 Use and Programming.........................................................................................3

6.2 Starting and Stopping ..........................................................................................4

6.2.1 Starting ................................................................................................................4

6.2.2 Stopping ..............................................................................................................5

6.3 Using operator interface on the PC .....................................................................6

6.3.1 Note on function mode ........................................................................................7

6.4 Machining procedures .........................................................................................9

6.4.1 Loading of machining programs ........................................................................10

6.4.2 Positioning a Panel............................................................................................12

6.4.3 Shavings/waste removal....................................................................................14

6.4.4 Risks of collisions with horizontal routing units..................................................21

6.4.5 Risks of collisions with vertical routing units......................................................21

6.5 Setting up the Machine......................................................................................22

6.5.1 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................23

6.6 Machine emergency state reset procedure .......................................................24

6.6.1 Procedure for resetting an emergency during machining..................................24

6.6.2 Reset procedure after a cycle stop (Hold) .........................................................25

6.6.3 Emergency restore procedure during a tool changing in MDI ...........................27

6.7 Programming .....................................................................................................28

6.7.1 Defining the work faces and the machining zones ............................................28

6.7.2 Definition of "OFFSET" for Optional Units .........................................................30

6.7.3 JERK functions ..................................................................................................32

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 1/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
6.8 Use of additional stop (Optional) .......................................................................33

6.9 Sanding tools.....................................................................................................35

Chap. 6 - Pag. 2/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.1 Use and Programming


(a632_ceb1.0-6.1)

WARNING: the use and the programming must be carried out by the qualified staff only (see chap.
1.3).

SMB124
WARNING: MAKING VARIATIONS TO THE MACHINE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED
THE MANUFACTURER DECLINES ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CAUSED TO PERSONS OR
OBJECTS AS A RESULT OF TAMPERING WITH THE MACHINE

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 3/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.2 Starting and Stopping


(a632_ceb1.0-6.2_inp)

6.2.1 Starting
(a355_1.0_ce_bps_6.2.1)

PRECAUTION: If the machine is being started for the first time, check that all securing brackets
and blocks have been removed (see section 4.4).

To switch on the machine, proceed as follows:


- Check that the compressed air supply is on. The pressure gauge E (fig. 6.2.1a) should give a reading of at least 6
BAR.
- Pull out the mouse table B (fig. 6.2.1b)
- Turn the main On/Off switch A to position ON
- Switch on the Computer: the Windows and Xilog Plus operator interface start procedure begins
- when the screen page shown in fig. 6.2.1c appears, you can start the machine by pressing the white pushbutton
R which lights up.
- The computer starts automatically. If it doesnt happen it is necessary to open the electrical cabinet with the
special key supplied and press the pushbutton on the computer)

Reached this point the procedure of Windows, Xilog Plus and operator interface starting, if Xilog Plus has not
been set up automatically it is necessary to launch it using the special icon on the desk stop

NOTE: if the white pushbutton R does not light up, check if any emergency or safety devices are
activated.

IMPORTANT: before resetting the emergency and/or safety devices, check that the causes of their
activation have been removed.

IMPORTANT: the white pushbutton R lights up to indicate that the machine is operating.
- The setting execute ( see chapter 4.1 of the planning handbook Panel Mac-Xilog Plus)
- When the message "sizing completed" appears on the display unit, the machine is ready to start machining.
- Turn on the chip extraction system (this is independent from the machine and optional).

N
IO

R
O OFF

NO
I
FFO O

B
E
$-UM515 Author_430-top_AL8080_02a

Fig. 6.2.1a Fig. 6.2.1b

Chap. 6 - Pag. 4/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

Fig. 6.2.1c

6.2.2 Stopping
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_6.2.2)

To switch on the machine, proceed as follows:


- we suggest to displace the axes in parking area, this in order to accelerate at the switch on of the machine the
calibration operation.
- Exit the operational mode on the NC
- Switch the machine to emergency stop condition.
- Close the Windows session (press Ctrl+ESC --> Close session --> Stop system)
- Turn off the continuity group (optional) if necessary
- Turn the main switch A to the OFF position.
- Clean and tidy up the working area.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 5/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.3 Using operator interface on the PC


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_6.3)

The introduction of the PC to borers-routers enables the operator to control the machine from a special operator
interface, designed and configured to facilitate and speed up machine use and programming.

The operator interface enables direct control of the machine logic (PLC) from the PC. The interface functions have
been designed to make full use of the machines potential without endangering safety in any way.

The use of a PC has enabled the introduction of a totally 'open' system for machine control. Unfortunately this
development has opened the way for third-party program developers who have little knowledge of the principles of
machine control and machinery safety.

Given this situation, SCM Group S.p.A. would like you to note the following:

1) Dealers, retailers or branches in general are not authorised to install or in any way promote the installation of an
operator interface not approved by SCM Group.

2) SCM Group declines all responsibility for machines equipped with operator interfaces other than those
authorised and installed by SCM.
The document "Diagnostics, Error messages and M codes" is available as a Pdf file, which can be read using
Acrobat Reader. Start Acrobat Reader by clicking its icon on the Windows desktop.
The file is in the following directory: C:\Programmi\Xilog Plus\country\"lingua"\Alrmhelp where "lingua" corresponds
to the language used in Xilog Plus
There is also a direct link to the file from Xilog Plus

If an error message has been received, using the ( F6 ) function key an on-line connection can be made with the
machine diagnostics and the page regarding the error in question can be found automatically (the connection to
the diagnostics file is made through Acrobat Reader, which is already installed on the machine PC).

Important: While the system is starting Acrobat Reader and opening the Diagnostics file, do not
touch any keys on the keyboard.

Chap. 6 - Pag. 6/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.3.1 Note on function mode


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_6.3.1)

"TEST" FUNCTION

To check that the piece program is running correctly the axis movement can be checked using TEST mode

In automatic mode it is possible to select:


"STEP STEP" MODE:
- one program line is processed at a time
MANUAL mode:
- manual mode operated from CNC
- machining heads stopped
- all EMERGENCY devices active

To move the axis:


Select axis on Xilog Plus machine panel and keep the keys pressed (or selector ) Jog+ and Jog-.

MDI mode:
See Xilog Plus manual

CALIBRATING mode:
See Xilog Plus manual

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 7/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 6 - Pag. 8/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.4 Machining procedures


(a-x5b_1.0_ce_fot_6.4)

Machining procedures are the operations to be performed in sequence in order to run one or more complete
machining cycles correctly.

We recommend the following sequence:


- Set up the machine: see sec. 6.5

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

- BEFORE STARTING THE WORK, IT IS IMPORTANT TO VERIFY THAT THE TOOLS RECALLED IN
THE WORK PROGRAM HAVE BEEN EQUIPPED IN A MANNER COMPATIBLE WITH THE WORK TO
BE CARRIED OUT.
- ALSO CHECK THAT THE TOOLS MOUNTED ON THE STOREROOM ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE
EQUIPPING RECALLED IN THE WORK PROGRAM.

- Switch on the machine or reset it: see ch. 6.2.1 / 2.1.1 / 2.1.2.
- load on the NC the program or the lists to be carried out (see ch. 6.4.1).
- Activate the air pump by the "T" selector (pic. 6.4a).
- Position the panel on the working table mentioned in the program (see pic. 6.4.2).

A A
I
O I E

T P1 P2
CMD_03

$-UM434d $-UM491 $-UM510

Fig. 6.4a Fig. 6.4b Fig. 6.4c

At this stage, the manufacturer recommends to first carry out a simulated test of the machinings and then a
machining with the related check measurements, before starting the machining of various pieces.
In order to do that, operate as follows:

- from the "automatic" function of "Panel Mac" (Xilog Plus) of the NC, digit through the horizontal function push
buttons the "simulated" modality (F7 push button).
- Push the P1 start button (pic. 6.4b) of the field qualified for the machining.
- By this operation, the NC simulates all the operations written on the program, moving just the 3 axis and checking
the absence of contradictions in the program.

A machining cycle may now be performed:


- Exit simulate mode by pressing the horizontal function key "simulate" (F7) on the "Panel Mac" (Xilog Plus)
- Press start pushbutton P1 (fig. 6.4b)
- When the machining is complete raise the suction cups with selector P2 (fig. 6.4c) and remove the panel
- Perform the check measurements.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 9/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.4.1 Loading of machining programs


(a632_ceb1.0-6.4.1)

Morbidelli recommends the following sequence of steps, in order to load the programs in a correct way:

1) if not active, open the interface SW "Panel Mac": double click on the icon
2) from menu "file" A (pic. 6.4.1a) select the "automatic execution" menu B and then select program or mix
program C
3) from the file "Job" (pic. 6.4.1 b) select the machining program (*.pgm) or the list (*.mix) you want to carry
out and then confirm by the "open" push button.

Fig. 6.4.1a

Fig. 6.4.1b

Check if the equipment D (pic. 6.4.1c) mentioned in the program is coherent with the E active one:
otherwise make the equipment active, the one which is mentioned in the program, by checking the
congruity among the working tools mentioned in the equipment and the ones installed in the
machine.

Chap. 6 - Pag. 10/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

Fig. 6.4.1c

4) Check the area/s F, where the program or the list is carried out and go on with the panel loading.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 11/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.4.2 Positioning a Panel


(a632_ce_bps_1.0-6.4.2)

To position a panel correctly on the work tables, proceed as follows:


- lift the reference stops (load a machining program in Automatic mode)
- check that the vacuum pump is ON
- slide the panel on the work tables, positioning it against the reference stops B (Fig. 6.4.2a)
- hold the panel so that it is resting firmly against the stops, then depending on the push-button panel mounted on
the machine, switch the selector P2 or push-button P7 (Fig. 6.4.2b) ON and OFF so that the suction cups hold the
panel
- at this point the stops draw back and the panel is ready for machining. The program box D (Fig. 6.4.2c) on the NC
turns dark blue if the field is immediately available for machining. It turns light blue if it is not immediately available
for machining and a selection is generated (this occurs when the machine is machining on another field).

WARNING: BEFORE YOU START MACHINING, MAKE SURE THE PANEL IS SECURE ON THE
WORK SURFACE

$-UM411a

Fig. 6.4.2a

Chap. 6 - Pag. 12/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

P4
P2 P1

P3

P
OPTIONAL
A-C B-D

P1
P5
P3
P7
$-UM445a

Fig. 6.4.2b

Fig. 6.4.2c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 13/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.4.3 Shavings/waste removal


(a632_ceb1.0-6.4.3)

When carrying out machining which produces shavings, follow the procedure described below to remove shavings
from the worktable.
There are two different machining situations, which require different methods:
- "pendulum" machining
- "non-pendulum" machining, using a single worktable

PENDULUM MACHINING

IMPORTANT: Shavings may be produced during pendulum machining. Unless these are removed,
they may be ejected by subsequent machining. To remove shavings, proceed as follows:

With pendulum machining (to be performed only in fields A and D) programme a "MIX" (see use and programming
manual) with a sequence of programs to divide the machining which creates shavings from the other machining.

N.B.: to carry out the MIX on the same panel, you must enable a PLC function by writing the ISO
command in the program editor : ISO - E10028=1 (for CNC - NUM) - ?%EDK[28]=1 (for CNC - ESA)

Fig. 6.4.3a

N.B.: the programming lines in the screen pages containing the figures are provided as an
example.

Chap. 6 - Pag. 14/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

Load the panel in field A and press the relative START pushbutton (see Fig. 6.4.3b), then you can load a second
panel in field D (see fig. 6.4.3c).

A
A600_33a2

Fig. 6.4.3b

Select machining in field D with the relative "start" pushbutton (Fig. 6.4.3c). When the machine has completed the
first machining in field A (which creates shavings), the machining unit moves to field D to carry out the first MIX
machining, leaving field A so that you can remove the shavings from the worktable in field A (Fig. 6.4.3d).

IMPORTANT: When removing shavings, always take care not to enter the machining field in which
the machining unit is working.

D
A600_33b2

Fig. 6.4.3c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 15/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

A
A600_33c2

Fig. 6.4.3d

Remove the shavings, then select machining in field A with the relative "start" pushbutton. When the machine has
performed the machining in field D the machining unit moves to field A to perform the subsequent machining in the
MIX, leaving field D so that you can remove any shavings from the worktable in field D (Fig. 6.4.3e). After removing
the shavings, select machining in field D with the relative "start" pushbutton.

D
A600_33d2

Fig. 6.4.3e

IMPORTANT: Upon completion of the machining, if you want to reset the workpiece decrement
system, return the CNC parameters to the original conditions, that is to say, write the ISO
command in the program Editor: ISO - E10028=0 (for CNC - NUM) - ?%EDK[28]=0 (for CNC - ESA)

Chap. 6 - Pag. 16/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

N.B.: Command ISO - E10028 (for CNC - NUM) - ?%EDK[28] (for CNC - ESA) manages workpiece
decrements:
- if you enter the value = 0 the workpiece decrement occurs when the workpiece is physically
released from the worktable
- if you enter the value = 1 the decrement occurs at the end of program execution

THE ISO E10028 COMMAND SET IN A PROGRAM REMAINS ON UNTIL YOU SWITCH OFF THE
MACHINE
AT POWER UP THE ISO E10028 DEFAULT COMMAND IS ALWAYS = 0

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 17/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
NON-PENDULUM MACHINING - USING A SINGLE WORKTABLE

When machining on a single worktable, include the two commands described below in the machining program, so
that when in the Hold state, the machining unit is parked in a zone which is far away from the operator, allowing
you to remove the shavings in safety.

Insert command line N (null operation - see user and programming manual sec. 5.2.1.1), entering values which
allow machining unit positioning in a safe parking zone, which does not obstruct shaving removal operations (see
example in figures 6.4.3g - 6.4.3h).
After command line N, insert the SET - STANDBY command, which enables the machine HOLD state

Fig. 6.4.3f

N.B.: the programming lines in the screen pages containing the figures are provided as an
example.
A600_34a2

Fig. 6.4.3g

Chap. 6 - Pag. 18/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

A600_34b2

Fig. 6.4.3h

After removing the shavings from the worktable, press the Start pushbutton on the CNC or the mobile control panel
to restart the machining program.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 19/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 6 - Pag. 20/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.4.4 Risks of collisions with horizontal routing units


(a430_top_2.1_ce_bps_6.4.4)

The horizontal boring from face 1 of the panel can be executed at 45 mm maximum distance.

B > (greater) S - 45

Es. :
S = 80mm
B minimum = 80 - 45 = 35
SUPPORT

ELETTROMANDRINO
ELECTROSPINDLE

SUPPORTO

SUPPORT

ELETTROMANDRINO
ELECTROSPINDLE

SUPPORTO
MAX 45mm

S
B
PIANO DI LAVORO PIANO DI LAVORO
WORK TABLE WORK TABLE
$-UM547

Fig. 6.4.4a

6.4.5 Risks of collisions with vertical routing units


(a430_top_2.1_ce_bps_6.4.5)

For working on particular panels (ex. Panels with lifting), use routers with suitable longer.
ELETTROMANDRINO
ELECTROSPINDLE

ELETTROMANDRINO
ELECTROSPINDLE
SUPPORTO
SUPPORT

SUPPORTO
SUPPORT

PIANO DI LAVORO PIANO DI LAVORO


WORK TABLE WORK TABLE
$-UM548

Fig. 6.4.5a

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 21/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.5 Setting up the Machine


(a-x5b_1.0_ce_fot_6.5)

The term "machine setup" is used to indicate the sequence of operations required to make the machine ready to
start machining panels.

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

THE MANUFACTURER recommends the following sequence of operations:


- Switch off the machine or switch it to emergency stop condition (sec. 6.2.2 / sec. 2.1.1 - 2.1.2)
- Clean the working area.

- Fit the tools (sec. 8.../ 9.../ 10.../ 12...)


- Adjust the panel support surfaces (sec. 6.4.2)
- Fit and adjust the panel gripping or clamping devices (sec. 7...)
- If the machine is switched off, switch it on (sec. 6.2.1)and switch it to emergency stop condition (sec.
2.1.1 - 2.1.2)

- Switch the N.C. to setting mode and enter the measurements of the tools fitted
(see Xilog programming manual)

WARNING: The machine is equipped with a device that detects the presence of a tool on the
electro spindle, BUT IT DOES NOT RECOGNIZE THE TYPE OF TOOL ACTUALLY MOUNTED.
CHECK THAT THE TOOLS MOUNTED ARE CONSISTENT WITH THOSE RECALLED IN THE WORK
PROGRAMS.

Chap. 6 - Pag. 22/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.5.1 Fitting the Tools


(a430_6.0_ce_bps_6.5.1)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.
Depending on the configuration, Author , can be equipped with the machining units described below, which must
be fitted with tools: for fitting instructions, consult the specific chapters for each operating unit in this manual, whilst
for CNC parameter configuration consult the use and programming manual, also supplied with the machine.

- Vertical boring heads with 12/18/30 spindles


- Boring units for hinges (optional)
- Vertical routing units with ISO30 / HSK63 fitting (optional)
- Routing units with cutter disk (optional)
- Horizontal routing units (optional)

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 23/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.6 Machine emergency state reset procedure


(a632_ceb1.0-6.6)

6.6.1 Procedure for resetting an emergency during machining


(a330_2.1_ce_bps_6.6.1)

If a machine emergency is activated during machining, all of the axes and motors stop.

The machine has a restarting program function that operates in the following way:
- white button restores from the emergency (fig. 6.6.1a)
- deactivate the Hold CN state by "start cycle" key : in this case the machine starts the working execution from
the point in which the emergency had been produced
- in case in which after the emergency it has to be realized a complete the execution of the program it is necessary
to press F10 key on the keyboard of the PC: before verify visually into the working piece the "trapped" conditions
of the tool.

WARNING: before restoring the machine and the CNC from emergency condition, verify that the
cause for the emergency has been resolved.

For the manual displacement of the axes it is necessary to operate as follows:

- Reset the machine emergency by pressing the white push-button (fig. 6.6.1a) for at least one second (until it
comes on)
- Select the axis to be moved with axis selector (fig. 6.6.1b) on the mobile push-button panel:
- machining on face 1 = select Z-axis
- machining on faces 2 - 3 = select X-axis
- machining on faces 4 - 5 = select Y-axis

+
X
F2
+ - F5

CMD_03

F10 Z4

Z5
Z3
Z2 Z
V
Y

X
Z F1
W A
C B

Z2 Z

F1
JOG +

F2
JOG -
Z3 V - F4
F3 F4 F5 F6
Z4 Y F3
Z5 X
W A
+
C B
Y
Author_327_BPS_04
CMD_22
$-UM431 -
Fig. 6.6.1a Fig. 6.6.1b Fig. 6.6.1c

Chap. 6 - Pag. 24/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.6.2 Reset procedure after a cycle stop (Hold)


(a632_ceb1.0-6.6.2_inp)

When you decide to perform checks during a machining cycle you can activate the "Hold" state with the "stop
cycle" key on the mobile push-button panel.
Under these conditions you can move the axes to extract the tool and move the mobile carriages.

NOTE: The CNC saves the movement made after the stop with the "Stop cycle" command and,
after the "Hold" state reset, only allows you to move the axes in the correct direction. They
automatically stop at the initial dimension.

To reset the initial conditions and continue the machining cycle from where it was interrupted, proceed as follows:
- press the "start cycle" key on the mobile push-button panel
- select the axes previously moved one at a time (first the X - Y axes and lastly the Z-axis) and reposition them at
the initial dimension where the cycle was interrupted.
- when all of the axes are at the initial position, press the "Start cycle" key to restart machining.

IMPORTANT: the axis can only move in the direction which takes it back to the starting dimension.
It cannot move in the opposite direction. For this reason, the Z-axis must be moved last so as to
avoid subsequent collisions between the tool and the workpiece being machined.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 25/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 6 - Pag. 26/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.6.3 Emergency restore procedure during a tool changing in MDI


(a327_ce_bps_1.3_6.6.3)

In case of emergency during a tool loading/unloading phase in MDI in which:


1) the safety tool is locked
2) the crib is in loading tool position,
3) the electrospindle is not in raised position and not even in loading tool
position:
CMD_03 C1
Z1
Y3 Y1

it is not possible:
X1
C4 C3
W3

1) displace along Z axis as it is locked from the PLC,


2) move the crib in parking position to avoid the fall of the cone, JOG + JOG -

3) close the safety of the tool as it can rip out the cone from the crib.
38 F1 F2

To restore the above condition it is necessary to:


F3 F4 F5 F6

- press white button for the restore to the emergency F7


F8
- press 38 and jog buttons

Only after these operations it is possible to close the safety of the tool and
move the crib in parking position
PIGNA_02b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 27/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.7 Programming
(a632_ceb1.0-6.7)

This section provides information to facilitate data entry during programming.


To program the NC refer to the specific manual enclosed.

6.7.1 Defining the work faces and the machining zones


(a632_ceb1.0-6.7.1)

Fig. 6.7.1a shows the panel work faces with the X and Y co-ordinates; the Z co-ordinate is used for the machining
depth.

0 X Y

Y X X
Y

F5
F3 Y

F1 X
X F4
F2 Y

0 X
F5
Y

0 X
0 X X
0
Y Y Y

F3 F1 F2
$-UM172

Y
0 X F4
$-UM256

Fig. 6.7.1a

Figure 6.7.1b indicates the carriage movement axes with the symbols showing increase (+) and reduce (-)
movements.

+
X
F2
+ - F5

Z F1
- F4
F3

+
Y
$-UM431 -
Fig. 6.7.1b

Chap. 6 - Pag. 28/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

-
(a632_ceb1.0-6.7.1a)

AUTHOR shows two working fields : A - D (see fig. 6.7.1c)


For every working field, depending on the machine configuration, there is a start button to A1 - D1.

A D

A D
I L
E H

$-UM456a
A1 D1
Fig. 6.7.1c

Where the centre stop is fitted (OPTIONAL) there are four working areas: A - B -C - D (see fig. 6.7.1d).
For every working field, depending on the machine configuration, there is a start button to A1 - B1 - C1 - D1 .

A B C D

A B C D
I J K L
E F G H

A1 B1 C1 D1
$-UM457a

Fig. 6.7.1d

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 29/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.7.2 Definition of "OFFSET" for Optional Units


(a632_ceb1.0-6.7.2)

The OFFSETS for the optional units are all defined in relation to spindle No.1 on the drilling head.
An OFFSET is memorized by the N.C. and is defined by entering the coordinates of the axis "A" of the spindle of
the unit concerned and of a plane "P" perpendicular to that axis.
On units installed by the manufacturer, the offset are defined during production and IT IS FORBIDDEN TO
CHANCE THEM.
The illustrations show the axes "A" and the planes "P" of the optional units currently in production.

VERTICAL ROUTER MK2 FITTING TOOLHOLDER ISO 30 FITTING

$-UM364
A HSK63
TOOLHOLDER HSK63 FITTING HINGE SLOTTING HEAD

Chap. 6 - Pag. 30/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

P P
$-UM216 $-UM328

DISK-TYPE CUTTER HORIZONTAL ROUTER

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 31/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

6.7.3 JERK functions


(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_6.8.1)

To optimise machine use in the various operating stages, a special software function (called JERK) has been
enabled, which can vary the machine response (and so its movements) to suit the workpiece machined.
The expert user can optimise the machine response, changing its movements according to the required speed -
precision ratio.
The Operator can set the Jerk function adjustment "level", favouring one over the other, or select a neutral situation
which takes into account both requirements.

Reference is made to the expert user because use of this function requires an in-depth knowledge of the various
machining requirements, as well as the various programming tools (manual program editing is necessary, plus the
ability to read the ISO list, in presence of Xilog Plus, and familiarity with list editing tools).

Those who do not want to, or do not feel able to make these changes can leave the SCM default
values, which guarantee a respectable compromise between finishing and roughing requirements,
without adding to the adjustment in each case.

JERK = a software function able to apply gradual machine acceleration, adjusting its development.
This function allows considerably reduced stop and acceleration times, with significant gains in
terms of workpiece overall machining times and reduced stress on the machine. The results which
can be achieved are linked to the type of workpiece being machined and are more noticeable with a
high number of stages involving rapid (G0) movement and acceleration or deceleration. For
example, the maximum gain is in boring cycles, the minimum gain in cycles only including routing
with consecutive slow movements (G1) ]

JERK LEVELS MACRO ACTIVATION (BY OPERATOR)


Only experience and previous machining tests can point to the correct value to be used for each program.
The program line in question may be repeated several times in the same program, each time the operator feels
that it is appropriate.
At present, management of such optimisation is not possible using the post-processors distributed by SCM,
therefore entry of the programming line and selection of the position in the program must be done by the Operator
with manual editing.
If in doubt, leave the default value !

In the presence of the Xilog Plus operator interface, the correct instruction, in compliance with the Routolink syntax,
becomes:
SET JERK=xxx (this is the instruction that makes the "JERK" activation request)

This instruction MUST be entered before the workpiece approach "XG0" for the start of machining.

RECOMMENDED VALUES:

"XXX" = 60->BORING
"XXX" = 90->ROUGHING
"XXX" >=160->FINISHING

Chap. 6 - Pag. 32/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.8 Use of additional stop (Optional)


(a430_6.0_ce_bps_6.8)

An additional stop A may be installed on the machine on request (fig. 6.8a).


This stop is used to machine panels that are larger than the standard work bench (see chap. 3.4).
Two rollers B are provided with the stop.

NOTE: when the vacuum cups positioned on the working table (see chap. 7.1.3.2 - 7.1.4.1) are used,
it's necessary to install the tubular spacers C and the extension D.

B A

C
B
C

£-UM474

Fig. 6.8a

PREMISE: As the panel to be machined is larger than the operators' unit working field, it is
necessary to write a list with two programs in order to perform all the types of machining on the
panel.

- write down the first program including the types of machining that can be performed on the field "D" (see fig. 6.8b)
- write down another program (still on the field "D") including the types of machining that could not be performed
with the first program, but replacing its origin with a value equal to the distance "X" between the stop E and the
stop A (see fig. 6.8c)
- write down a list to recall the previous programs.

F E A
X

F1
$-UM217b

Fig. 6.8b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 33/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN

E1

E A
X

D
F
B

$-UM217c

Fig. 6.8c

NOTE: Before machining, it is advisable to position the SETTING selector switch on "I" ; press start
to start the cycle in "mock" mode. In this way, it can be checked if the operators' units movements
correspond to the types of machining required to be performed on the panel.

The panels can now be machined:


- recall the program list on the CNC
- use the pneumatic cock F1 to disable the stop F (fig. 6.8b)
- place the panel against the ledges of field D
- start suckers and check the panel is firmly placed onto the work bench
- start the cycle and wait for the machine to complete the first program of the list
- position the SETTING selector switch on
- use the pneumatic cock E1 to disable the stop E (fig. 6.8c)
- release the panel
- place the panel against the stop A
- start suckers and check the panel is firmly placed onto the work bench
- position the SETTING selector switch on
- start the cycle again to perform the second machining program

PRECAUTION: When the supplementary right-hand stop is not used, it is advisable to disassemble
the roller units B as there is a possibility of collision with them during machining on field D with
horizontal heads on "face 2" of the panel.

Chap. 6 - Pag. 34/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine

6.9 Sanding tools


(tamponi)

With "sanding tool" we mean: tools for surface finisching, utilizing on wood working machinery, generally composed
of abrasive material reported on plastic support fixed on a metal base.

ATTENTION: This particular type of tool has to be configured in the software of


the (Xilog Plus), as "L" type tool.
See table "parameter list" (L = Sanding tool, see manual of Xilog Plus)

It's forbidden to utilize sanding tools without having configured them as "L type tool" on the
set up table of Xilog Plus SCM Group S.p.A. refuses all responsibilities for damages
caused to persons or things due to the non-observance of the indications detailed on this
manual.

ATTENTION: The rollers or sanding brushless are tools particulars, for this reason it is
recommended:- DO NOT UTILIZE TOOLS IN WHICH THERE ISN'T MARKED ON THE
MAXIMUM SPEED OF ROTATION - DO NOT TRAPASSING THE ROTATION SPEED MARKED
ON THE TOOL - DO NOT UTILIZE THIS TYPE OF TOOL FOR WORKING DIFFERENT OF THE
ONES FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED

Maximum rotation for this tool is 1500 r.p.m.


La the machine has been configured in order do not accept rotation values more the 1500
r.p.m.

For the use and maintenance of the sanding units consult the indications supplied by the constructor.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 6 - Pag. 35/36
AUTHOR 330
6 - Use and general adjustments of the standard machine EN
.
(sp3)

Chap. 6 - Pag. 36/36 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

INDEX

7.2.1 Work table "TV - Morbidelli" type.........................................................................2

7.2.2 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................3

7.2.3 Work table configurations ....................................................................................4

7.2.3.1 Positioning - removing the central stop bars .......................................................6

7.2.4 Description of the pushbutton control panel ........................................................7

7.2.5 Positioning and tooling-up the work table............................................................8

7.2.5.1 Positioning and tooling-up the work table with suction cups ...............................8

7.2.5.3 Loading aids ......................................................................................................11

7.2.5.4 Positioning a Panel............................................................................................12

7.2.5.5 Installation of auxiliary vacuum (working by jig ) - Optional..............................13

7.2.5.6 Laser device for vacuum cups positioning (Optional)........................................14

7.2.6 Maintenance ......................................................................................................15

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 1/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN
7.2.1 Work table "TV - Morbidelli" type
(pdl_tvm_1.0_3651)

The "TV - Morbidelli" type work table is an innovative table which is easily configured and allows simple, rapid
positioning, insertion or removal of blocking devices (suction cups) thanks to its special structure.
Panels of any size and shape can be blocked with this system (compatible with the dimensions of the work field)
and almost all types of machining operations can be executed without having to insert additional devices.

For greater safety, the table is equipped with a vacuum detection system (using vacuum switches) for blocking the
panel.
Every work field is equipped with this detection system.
The vacuum switches inform the CNC of correct panel blocking: if there is insufficient vacuum, the CNC prevents
the cycle from starting or stops the cycle during machining.

The work table (Fig. 1) consists of:


- suction cup support A with sliding devices A1 and pneumatic brakes A2
(if requested, these sliding devices can be mounted on guides with recirculating bearing shoes with the relative
pneumatic brakes)
- control button strip B (one for each work field)
- suction cup blocking devices C
- side stops E
- bottom stops F

Optional features:
- loading bars D
- stops G for double centre zero
- second row of bottom stops H
- display L for reading table dimensions in X and suction cup dimensions in Y
- clamps M for machining straight and arced frames
- devices N for machining panels with edges

M E
N
F H

F H C
A
G
C
A A1

D A2
L
L
B
B
OPTIONAL
PDL_TV_MORB_04

Fig. 1

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 2/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

7.2.2 Technical Characteristics


(pdl_tvm_1.0_3652)

Work table:
Y - Table lengths = 1300 - 1500 - 1700 mm
X - Width of work area = depending on the machine model
V - Blocking devices = see figure

Machining fields:
Standard = A-D
Optional with one row of stops = A-B-C-D
Optional with double row of stops = A-B-C-D/I-J-K-L

A B C D

I Y J K L

V 145 145 180

145 55 65
PDL_TV_MORB_02

Fig. 2

NOTE: With the "TV Morbidelli" type work table, the "panel passage" is reduced to 160mm

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 3/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN

7.2.3 Work table configurations


(pdl_tvm_1.0_3653)

Depending on the machine work table configuration, the following machining area configurations are possible,
according to the panel size or machining method:

1) Standard work table with machining fields A - D. In this configuration full use is made of the machining
areas.

NOTE: On work tables with central double zero reference, you can remove the central movable
stop bars to create the above-mentioned configuration (see the next chapter).

PDL_SCHM_03

Fig. 3

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 4/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

2) close double centre zero reference to use fields A - C or B - D to the maximum (fig. 4)

A C

B D

PDL_SCHM_04

Fig. 4

NOTE: In this configuration, as an optional feature, the central double zero reference may be
slightly wider to allow horizontal boring in direction "X" on face 2 of field B and/or on face 3 of field
C (see the next chapter).

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 5/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN

7.2.3.1 Positioning - removing the central stop bars


(pdl_"tv"36331)

The device described below is of the mobile, removable type (optional)

To remove/position the centre stop bars:

- loosen knob B
- to remove, simply extract the bars
- to position, remove the bars then loosen the screws with the washers C to free the positioning slots below
- tighten the screws with washers C in the threaded holes D to close the slots below and prevent positioning errors

C
B

B
C

C C

PDL_SCHM_05

Fig. 5

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 6/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

7.2.4 Description of the pushbutton control panel


(pdl_tvm_1.0_3654)

The configuration of the control panels may differ according to the machine configuration.

Version with suction cups only

- Push-buttons A start the work cycle (one push-button for each working area);
- The selector B activates the suction cups and the loading aids (if enabled)
- Multi-function mushroom-head button E (Optional) activates the suction cups and the loading aids (if enabled)
- Push-button C releases the work table
- The optional dimension display D is used for guided positioning of the work tables and suction cups. The
machining program sends the display the dimensions for work table and suction cup positioning. For viewing, use
push-button D1: H = work table positioning dimension; 1-2-3-4 = suction cup positioning dimensions

A B
D
D1 C
A
D E
D1
B A
PDL_TV_MORB_05
C
Fig. 6

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 7/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN

7.2.5 Positioning and tooling-up the work table


(pdl_tvm_1.0_3655)

7.2.5.1 Positioning and tooling-up the work table with suction cups
(pdl_tvm_1.0_36551)

To move the support surfaces A (Fig. 7), proceed as follows:


- Grip the handle B, press pushbutton C and slide the surface A on its guides.
- Release the pushbutton C to stop the surface in the desired position.

You may move the suction heads along the support surface according to the size of the panels to be worked. To do
so, proceed as follows:
- activate selector E
- this releases gib F and allows the suction cups to be moved along the table
- furthermore, again with the selector activated, new suction cups can be extracted or inserted

WARNING: Before attaching the suction cups D ensure that the support surface is clean.

The number and type of suction cups to be used vary according to the shape, panel dimensions and the type of
machining to be performed.

NOTE: If you leave suction cups mounted on the worktable, but do not use them for panel hold-
down (we strongly discourage this), you must switch them off by pressing push-button G down as
far as it will go, until suction cup suction is turned off. In this way, you achieve the maximum
vacuum on the other suction cups used for panel hold-down.

G D

A
G D

F
E
B

PDL_TV_MORB_07
C
Fig. 7

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 8/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

WARNING:
We advise using the maximum number of suction cups in relation to the panel size
Remove the unutilised suction cups from the work table (danger of impact during machining)
The suction cups must not be positioned in correspondence to the scrap coming from the panel
being machined

RECTANGULAR SUCTION CUPS TOOLING

To turn the rectangular suction cups, loosen the screw A until the rotation disk is released.
When positioning is complete, tighten the screw A again.

A A
PDL_TV_MORB_03

Fig. 7a

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 9/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 10/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

7.2.5.3 Loading aids


(pdl_tvm_1.0_36553)

This type of table requires the use of load bars A (Fig. 9) to facilitate panel positioning (Optional): they are enabled
by using selector B on the control panel

With the selector in position "O" the loading bars are disabled.

To activate them, set selector C to position "I":


- position the panel on the loading bars and rest it against the stops
- turn selector B to the neutral position to activate the suction cups and lock the panel in place
- to release the panel and raise the loading bars, turn selector B .

To activate them with the pushbutton D (optional), set selector C to position "I" :
- position the panel on the loading bars and rest it against the stops
- press and release pushbutton D: the bars are lowered and you can adjust the position of the panel
- press and release pushbutton D to activate the suction cups and lock the panel in place

- to release the panel press and release pushbutton D; the loading bars are raised after around one second

WARNING: To activate Selector C functions you must set "Automatic" mode on the CNC.

A O I

B
D
B
PDL_TV_MORB_09
OPTIONAL P
Fig. 9

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 11/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN

7.2.5.4 Positioning a Panel


(pdl_tvm_1.0_36554)

To position a panel correctly on the work surfaces, proceed as follows:

- based on the panel size and shape, position the tables and the suction cups
- if necessary, enable the load devices
- in automatic mode, select and enable the desired machining program on the CNC (see attached user's and
programming manual): the stops in the work field to be used are lifted
- slide the panel on the work tables positioning it against stops A fig. 9a (A1 in the case of a double row of stops)
- keeping the panel firmly pressed against the stops, enable selector B (pushbutton C) so that the suction cups
hold the panel
- The stops now retract and the panel is ready to be machined

NOTE: Use the selector D to activate the second row of end stops

WARNING: BEFORE YOU START MACHINING, MAKE SURE THE PANEL IS SECURE ON THE
WORK SURFACE

A
A

A A1 A1

D
B C
B
PDL_TV_MORB_08
OPTIONAL
Fig. 9a

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 12/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

7.2.5.5 Installation of auxiliary vacuum (working by jig ) - Optional


(pdl_tvm_1.1_7255)

On demand (Optional) can be installed on the machine a vacuum auxiliary system

Material supplied for the realization / connection of the jigs


- filters A
- gasket B
- nipples for connection to the jig C
- pipeline and nipples for connection jig / installation to vacuum D

After the realization of the jig in the shape desired, insert the accessories as shown in the figure.

Fori per filtro e collegamento


impianto depressione canale per guarnizione
Holes for filter and for connection
to vacuum installation
B canal for gasket

7,5
Ø 27,8 6
Ø 24

Ø8

A lavorazione per depressione


working for vacuum

piani di supporto pezzo


plans to piece support

C
D
0 1

E
Controsagoma_02
E
Fig. 10

Working cycle :

1) - working programs loading (see chap. 6.4.1)


2) - rotate the E selector in "0" position
3) - place and lock the jig on the vacuum cups (see. chap. 6.4.2)
4) - rotate E selector in "1" position
5) - carry out with D pipeline the connection between the machine and the jig

Now the management of the vacuum moves to the auxiliary system with standard locking panel modalities
(see chap. 6.4.2).

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 13/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN

7.2.5.6 Laser device for vacuum cups positioning (Optional)


(pdl_laser_1.0)

On demand it is possible to have a system by a laser pointer device to drive the positioning of the vacuum cups.

In accordance with EN 60825-1:2003-02 the laser used has protection class 2M.
During operation, lasers of this class do not necessitate special protection. Simply follow the instructions below.
1) Instruct Operators never to look directly at the source of the laser beam.
2) Do not use additional optical equipment.
3) Do not alter or adjust existing shields.
4) Do not change the type of laser without the machine manufacturer's approval.
5) Repairs must be done by the manufacturer only.
6) Switch off the laser when not in use.

Consult Xilog Plus manual - PanelMac, chapter "5.2 Working table management by laser lights" for the use

Z2 Z
Z3 V
Z4 Y

Z5 X
W A
C B

JOG + JOG -

F1 F2

F3 F4 F5 F6

PDL_TV_MORB_13

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 14/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS

7.2.6 Maintenance
(pdl_tvm_1.0_36555)

The TV-Morbidelli work table does not require special maintenance:

- before moving or mounting the suction cups, it is important to clean the table, especially at suction cup sliding
points A (Fig. 10)

- clean the table slide bars B weekly, particularly in slide zone C where fine sawdust may mix with the re-circulating
ball bearing bushing lubricant; after cleaning, wipe slide bars B using a cloth slightly dampened with neutral oil

A A

D E

A A B C E
D
C E

B C
B E

C
PDL_TV_MORB_10
B
Fig. 10

If you have work tables with sliding devices on recirculating bearing shoes (optional), lubricate the shoes weekly:
- Inject approximately 1-2cm3 of grease Type "AGIP GRMU EP0" into each grease nipple D (Fig. 10). Clean away
any excess grease.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 15/16
AUTHOR 330
7.2 - "TV - Morbidelli" type Worktable - Rel. 1.2 - BPS EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 7.2 - Pag. 16/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

INDEX

8.21 Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles .............................................3

8.21.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

8.21.2 Fitting the Tools ...................................................................................................7

8.21.2.1 Tooling up............................................................................................................7

8.21.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles...........................................8

8.21.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters ......................................................................................9

8.21.3 Maintenance and lubrication..............................................................................11

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 1/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

.
(sp)

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 2/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21 Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles


(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21a)

The operating unit is composed of:


- boring head A with 12 vertical independent spindles
- the selection of the vertical spindles and the horizontal heads takes place in a pneumatic way.
- Support B on which the slide C glides through recirculating ball screws, moved by a pneumatic cylinder D

-If requested (optional):


- 2+2 horizontal spindles in "X" direction (E)
- 1+1 horizontal spindles in "Y" direction (F)
- "Integrated saw unit" in X direction (G).

The boring head is used in workings to execute vertical borings on the panel face 1 and horizontal borings on
panel faces 2-3-4-5.

D
B

F
E
G
TFV12m+FD_A-TOP_01a

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 3/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21.1 Technical Characteristics


(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.1)

Number of spindles 12 vertical (8 in X - 5 in Y)


Optional 6 horizontal (2+2 in X / 1+1 in Y)
Number of spindles(Optional) 11 vertical (7 in X - 5 in Y)
8 horizontal (2+2 in X / 2+2 in Y)
Wheelbase 32mm
Vertical spindle coupling right and left M10 threaded hole
Horizontal spindle coupling right and left M8 threaded hole
Spindle rotation speed 6000rpm
Motor power 3kW (4Hp)
Z axis vertical run at CN 400mm
Pneumatic vertical run for each spindle 60mm
Maximum length of boring head see figure

Maximum diameter of drill bits

Ø11h7 Ø11h7
Ø11h7 M10 (L-R)
M10 (L-R)
M10 (L-R)
13 13
13 4 4
4
M8 (L-R)

MAX
Ø9h7

11 4 80
MAX
MAX 80
80
80

Ø MAX
$-UM17c $-UM272 $-UM16m
35 $-UM15B

Fig. 2 Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

R L *R
* ** ** ** * * * ** L
R L R L R L R R
R L ** R
L
** L
* R

L * == Ømax 35mm

TFV12m+FD_A-TOP_02
** Ømax 32mm
Fig. 3

NOTE: The centre-to-centre distance between the spindles is 32 mm. This means that the total of
the diameters of two bits mounted side by side must not exceed 64 mm.

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 4/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

-
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.1a_inp)

SPINDLE NUMBERING AND SENSE OF ROTATION

R
60 R L 61 1 R 58 L
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 2 L R
R
R L R L R L R L
62 R L 63 3 R R
L
4 L
L
5 R 59

Author_top_A632_02a
82 $-UM355

Fig. 4 Fig. 4a

. -
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.1b)

Maximum diameter of disc-type cutters

INTEGRATED SAW UNIT (OPTIONAL): MAX 120mm MAX


6mm
Speed rotation 6000rpm
Pneumatic vertical stroke 60mm
Tool attachment hole 30mm

Ø 30 h6 (- 00,013 )
Maximum diameter router 120mm
Maximum thickness 6mm

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards


"EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European
Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's 30mm
instructions. $-UM14e

Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward


speeds must be selected with great care by the
operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds must
never be exceeded.

. -
(for_or)

The horizontal boring from face 1 of the panel can be executed at 45 mm


maximum distance.

B > (greater) S - 45 MAX 45mm


Es. :
S = 80mm
B minimum = 80 - 45 = 35 S
B

$-UM545

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 5/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

.
(sp1)

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 6/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21.2 Fitting the Tools


(=t12/18m_1.0_8.3.2_ps)

To ensure efficient operation and a long working life of the spindle, observe the following basic precautions:

a) Only work with balanced tools.


b) Before fitting a tool, thoroughly clean the contact surfaces between the tool and the spindle using a soft cloth.
(DO NOT USE EMERY CLOTH!) Remove all traces of oil and ensure that the contact surfaces are not marked.
This will ensure good tool centring and thus reduce imbalance and vibration to the minimum.
c) Do not use force when fitting or removing a tool. Do not attempt to release the tool by knocking the spindle or
the tool spanner with a hammer. This can break the tool and cause irreparable damage to the bearings.
d) When you have finished using a tool, clean and oil the taper and threads and then store the tool in its
container.
e) Always use cutting speeds, feed speeds, tool lengths and diameters to match the machining operation.

SMB124
WARNING: Permitted operating speeds are marked on the tools. Do not exceed these limits.

8.21.2.1 Tooling up
(t12_ax5-31121)

The tool configuration is set in the tooling up phase (see user's and programming manual).
The principle identification parameters for the miller unit dimensions are shown in the figure.

L
U

D
$-UM358

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 7/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles


(tf_12mv_ax5_4.0_8.2.2.2)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the drilling bits, you need the following:


- 15*mm open-ended spanner
- spindle locking pin

* Spanner size depends on drilling bit design.

Fit the bits as follows:


- Insert the clockwise rotating bits into spindles R and the counterclockwise rotating bits in spindles L (See Fig.7 )

- Tighten the bits with the open-ended spanner A (Fig. 8 - 9) and tighten the spindles with the pin supplied B.

R
L
R
B L
R
L

A
$-UM356 $-UM355

Fig. 8 Fig. 8a

A1

$-UM290a

Fig. 9

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 8/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters


(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.2.3-)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 34-38 mm C-spanner
- 8mm Allen spanner

To fit the disk-type cutters, proceed as follows:

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D (Fig. 11) .
- Using the C spanner A undo the ring nut B
- Extract the fastening flanges C
- Fit the disc-type cutter in to fastening flanges C

WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D and tighten the ring nut fully home with the C-spanner A.

B
C

D A
FD_A430-TOP_01a

Fig. 11

ATTENTION: VERIFY THE STATE OF THE SELF-LOCKING NUT "B": IF THE PLASTICS RING INSIDE
OF IT IS CONSUMED, IT IS NECESSARY TO IMMEDIATELY REPLACE THE SELF-LOCKING NUT
WITH ONE OF THE SAME TYPE (cod. 0000301848F)

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 9/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

.
(sp2)

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 10/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.21.3 Maintenance and lubrication


(ag-3103)

WARNING: All cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed by skilled personnel only.
Before you start any cleaning or maintenance operations, switch off and lock out the main
electrical and compressed air switches.

Do not attempt to perform repairs or other operations not described in this manual.

This machine must only be used and maintained by suitably qualified and authorised personnel.
All operations requiring dismantling of machine components must only be performed by suitably skilled and
authorised personnel.
When changing machine parts only use original MORBIDELLI spare parts. MORBIDELLI declines all responsibility
for damage caused by the use of non-original MORBIDELLI spare parts.
Accident prevention regulations, safety precautions and occupational health and safety recommendations must be
followed at all times.

CAUTION!: FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THIS MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAY EFFECT MACHINING
QUALITY AND CAN INCREASE THE RISK OF TOOL BREAKAGE.

NOTE: The maintenance intervals given above are intended as a guide only. With particularly dusty
operations (e.g. machining agglomerates) the maintenance operations must be performed more
frequently to ensure continued machine efficiency.

-
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.2.3a)

Every 8 hours (daily maintenance):


Lubricating the recirculating ball screws and sliding blocks:

NOTE: the machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings; in these
cases the lubrication intervals specified must be halved.

- Inject approximately 1cm3 of grease (aprox. 2 pumping - Type "AGIP GRMU EP0") into each grease nipple F (Fig.
13). Clean away any excess grease.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 11/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

Every 800-1000 hours (six-monthly maintenance):


Lubricate the 12 spindles on the main head:

For a correct lubrication operate as follows:

- To mount on a spindle, possibly next to the motorization, a sufficiently long screw M10 to be able to apply then an
electric screwdriver or a pneumatic drill
- Apply a pneumatic screw driver or pneumatic drill (at charge of the customer) on the A screw to make the spindle
turn (we suggest a rotation of 200÷500 rpm)

- Inject approximately 10cm3 of grease (aprox. 14 pumping - Type "KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU15") into each grease
nipple T1 (Fig. 13)
- With the pneumatic screw driver, previously mounted, make the Head spindles turn for at least 2 min. to obtain a
correct distribution of the grease.

IMPORTANT: Failure to perform this operation, making the head revolve only when the motor is
started, means that the grease would "shoot off" and the gears would not be lubricated.

N.B.: The above-mentioned operations must be carried out 2 times in order to insert 40cm3 of
grease in the head.
The best lubrication results could be obtained making the spindles turn with the drill while
pumping the grease in the lubricator.

F
F

Q
T1

TFV12m+FD_A-TOP_01b

Fig. 13

-
(t12/18m_1.0_8.3.3b)

Every 800-1000 hours:


Lubricate the horizontal heads:
- Inject approximately 2cm3 of grease (aprox. 3 pumping - Type KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU15) into each grease
nipple Q (Fig. 13).

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 12/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.9.3a)

Every 1000 hours:


Cutter disk unit lubrication:

- Inject approximately 5cm3 of grease (aprox. 7 pumping - Type "KLÜBER - ISOFLEX NBU 15") into grease nipple
A.

A
FD_A430-TOP_01b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 13/14
AUTHOR 330
8.21 - Boring head with 12 independent vertical spindles and integrated disk-type EN
cutter (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

.
(sp3)

Chap. 8.21 - Pag. 14/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

INDEX

8.29 Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles ...............................................3

8.29.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

8.29.2 Fitting the Tools ...................................................................................................6

8.29.2.1 Tooling up............................................................................................................6

8.29.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles...........................................7

8.29.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters ......................................................................................8

8.29.3 Maintenance and lubrication................................................................................9

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 1/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 2/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.29 Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles


(tf_7mv_1.1_a300_8.29)

The operating unit is composed of:


- boring head A (pic. 1) with 7 vertical independent spindles : the selection of the vertical spindles takes place in a
pneumatic way.
- a mobile support B mounted on guides and recirculating ball screw slides with moving system means pneumatic
cylinder C

-If requested (optional):


- 1+1 horizontal spindles in "X" direction (E)
- 1+1 horizontal spindles in "Y" direction (F)
- "Integrated saw unit" in X direction (G).

The boring head is used in workings to execute vertical borings on the panel face 1 and horizontal borings on
panel faces 2-3-4-5.

F
E
Testa_7m_02c
G
Fig. 1

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 3/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN

8.29.1 Technical Characteristics


(tf_7mv_1.1_a300_8.29.1)

Number of spindles 7 vertical (5 in X - 3 in Y)


Wheelbase 32mm
Spindle coupling right and left M10 threaded hole
Spindle rotation speed 4000rpm
Motor power 2,2kW (3Hp)
Pneumatic vertical run 235mm
Pneumatic vertical run for each spindle 60mm
Maximum length of boring head see figure

Optional 4 horizontal (1+1 in X / 1+1 in Y)


Horizontal spindle coupling right and left M8 threaded hole

Maximum diameter of drill bits

Ø11h7
Ø11h7
Ø11h7 M10 (L-R)
M10 (L-R)
M10 (L-R)
13
4 13
13 4
4
M8 (L-R)

MAX
Ø9h7

MAX 11 4 80
MAX 80
80
80

Ø MAX
$-UM17c $-UM272 $-UM16m
35 $-UM15B

Fig. 2 Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

** * ** ** **
**
*

* == Ømax 35mm

** Ømax 32mm
Testa_7m_01b

Fig. 3

NOTE: The centre-to-centre distance between the spindles is 32 mm. This means that the total of
the diameters of two bits mounted side by side must not exceed 64 mm.

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 4/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

-
(tf_7mv_1.1_a300_8.29.1a)

SPINDLE NUMBERING AND SENSE OF ROTATION

R
58 R 60 R L 61 L
R 5 4 3 R
2 1 L
L R L R R
6 L
L
R
L 7
59 82

Testa_7m_01a
L $-UM355

Fig. 4 Fig. 4a

. -
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.1b)

Maximum diameter of disc-type cutters

INTEGRATED SAW UNIT (OPTIONAL): MAX 120mm MAX


6mm
Speed rotation 6000rpm
Pneumatic vertical stroke 60mm
Tool attachment hole 30mm

Ø 30 h6 (- 00,013 )
Maximum diameter router 120mm
Maximum thickness 6mm

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards


"EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European
Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's 30mm
instructions. $-UM14e

Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward


speeds must be selected with great care by the
operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds must
never be exceeded.

. -
(for_or)

The horizontal boring from face 1 of the panel can be executed at 45 mm


maximum distance.

B > (greater) S - 45 MAX 45mm


Es. :
S = 80mm
B minimum = 80 - 45 = 35 S
B

$-UM545

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 5/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN

8.29.2 Fitting the Tools


(=t12/18m_1.0_8.3.2_ps)

To ensure efficient operation and a long working life of the spindle, observe the following basic precautions:

a) Only work with balanced tools.


b) Before fitting a tool, thoroughly clean the contact surfaces between the tool and the spindle using a soft cloth.
(DO NOT USE EMERY CLOTH!) Remove all traces of oil and ensure that the contact surfaces are not marked.
This will ensure good tool centring and thus reduce imbalance and vibration to the minimum.
c) Do not use force when fitting or removing a tool. Do not attempt to release the tool by knocking the spindle or
the tool spanner with a hammer. This can break the tool and cause irreparable damage to the bearings.
d) When you have finished using a tool, clean and oil the taper and threads and then store the tool in its
container.
e) Always use cutting speeds, feed speeds, tool lengths and diameters to match the machining operation.

SMB124
WARNING: Permitted operating speeds are marked on the tools. Do not exceed these limits.

8.29.2.1 Tooling up
(t12/18m_1.0_8.3.2.1)

The tools configuration is set during the setting up (see the use and programming handbook).
The main identification parameters of the boring bit dimensions are shown in the pictures.

L
U

D
$-UM358

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 6/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.29.2.2 Fitting Drillling Bits on Vertical - Horizontal Spindles


(tf_12mv_ax5_4.0_8.2.2.2)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the drilling bits, you need the following:


- 15*mm open-ended spanner
- spindle locking pin

* Spanner size depends on drilling bit design.

Fit the bits as follows:


- Insert the clockwise rotating bits into spindles R and the counterclockwise rotating bits in spindles L (See Fig.7 )

- Tighten the bits with the open-ended spanner A (Fig. 8 - 9) and tighten the spindles with the pin supplied B.

R
L
R
B L
R
L

A
$-UM356 $-UM355

Fig. 8 Fig. 8a

A1

$-UM290a

Fig. 9

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 7/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN

8.29.2.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters


(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.21.2.3-)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 34-38 mm C-spanner
- 8mm Allen spanner

To fit the disk-type cutters, proceed as follows:

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D (Fig. 11) .
- Using the C spanner A undo the ring nut B
- Extract the fastening flanges C
- Fit the disc-type cutter in to fastening flanges C

WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D and tighten the ring nut fully home with the C-spanner A.

B
C

D A
FD_A430-TOP_01a

Fig. 11

ATTENTION: VERIFY THE STATE OF THE SELF-LOCKING NUT "B": IF THE PLASTICS RING INSIDE
OF IT IS CONSUMED, IT IS NECESSARY TO IMMEDIATELY REPLACE THE SELF-LOCKING NUT
WITH ONE OF THE SAME TYPE (cod. 0000301848F)

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 8/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

8.29.3 Maintenance and lubrication


(ag-3103)

WARNING: All cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed by skilled personnel only.
Before you start any cleaning or maintenance operations, switch off and lock out the main
electrical and compressed air switches.

Do not attempt to perform repairs or other operations not described in this manual.

This machine must only be used and maintained by suitably qualified and authorised personnel.
All operations requiring dismantling of machine components must only be performed by suitably skilled and
authorised personnel.
When changing machine parts only use original MORBIDELLI spare parts. MORBIDELLI declines all responsibility
for damage caused by the use of non-original MORBIDELLI spare parts.
Accident prevention regulations, safety precautions and occupational health and safety recommendations must be
followed at all times.

CAUTION!: FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THIS MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAY EFFECT MACHINING
QUALITY AND CAN INCREASE THE RISK OF TOOL BREAKAGE.

NOTE: The maintenance intervals given above are intended as a guide only. With particularly dusty
operations (e.g. machining agglomerates) the maintenance operations must be performed more
frequently to ensure continued machine efficiency.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 9/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN
-
(tf_7mv_1.0_a300_8.29.3)

Every 8 hours (daily maintenance):


Lubricating the recirculating ball screws and sliding blocks:
- Inject approximately 1cm3 of grease (aprox. 2 pumping - Type "AGIP GRMU EP0") into each grease nipple F (Fig.
13). Clean away any excess grease.

Every 800-1000 hours (six-monthly maintenance):


Lubricate the 7 spindles on the main head:
For a correct lubrication operate as follows:
- To mount on a spindle, possibly next to the motorization, a sufficiently long screw M10 to be able to apply then an
electric screwdriver or a pneumatic drill
- Apply a pneumatic screw driver or pneumatic drill (at charge of the customer) on the A screw to make the spindle
turn (we suggest a rotation of 200÷500 rpm)
- Inject approximately 5cm3 of grease (aprox. 7 pumping - Type KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU15) into each grease
nipple T (Fig. 13).
- With the pneumatic screw driver, previously mounted, make the Head spindles turn for at least 2 min. to obtain a
correct distribution of the grease.

IMPORTANT: Failure to perform this operation, making the head revolve only when the motor is
started, means that the grease would "shoot off" and the gears would not be lubricated.

N.B.: The above-mentioned operations must be carried out 3 times in order to insert 30cm3 of
grease in the head.
The best lubrication results could be obtained making the spindles turn with the drill while
pumping the grease in the lubricator.

A
Q T

Testa_7m_02d

Fig. 13

-
(t12/18m_1.0_8.3.3b)

Every 800-1000 hours:


Lubricate the horizontal heads:
- Inject approximately 2cm3 of grease (aprox. 3 pumping - Type KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU15) into each grease
nipple Q (Fig. 13).

-
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.9.3a)

Every 1000 hours:

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 10/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1

Cutter disk unit lubrication:

- Inject approximately 5cm3 of grease (aprox. 7 pumping - Type "KLÜBER - ISOFLEX NBU 15") into grease nipple
A.

A
FD_A430-TOP_01b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 11/12
AUTHOR 330
8.29 - Boring head with 7 independent vertical spindles (Optional) - Rel. 1.1 EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 8.29 - Pag. 12/12 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

INDEX

9.28 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector ..................................................2

9.28.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

9.28.2 Fitting the Tools ...................................................................................................6

9.28.2.1 Tooling up............................................................................................................7

9.28.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting ........................8

9.28.2.3 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle .......................................................................9

9.28.2.4 Sanding tools.......................................................................................................9

9.28.3 Maintenance and lubrication..............................................................................10

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance..................................................11

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 1/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN
9.28 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector
(em_top_2.0_hsk-6,6kw_9.28)

This operating unit is equipped with one electro-spindle A (fig. 1) for tools with HSK63 attachment installed on a
support/slide B:
All movements involve sliding on prismatic guides with recirculating ball screws. The movements are made
possible using top quality recirculating ball screws.

The electro-spindle has a clamping system designed for DIN 69893 type tool tapers. A spring-loaded tie-rod inside
the spindle ensures a perfect clamping fit between the tapers and guarantees full transmission of all motor power
to the tool.
Microswitches are triggered to inform the CNC unit if the tool is clamped or released and if the electro-spindle is
stopped or rotating. If the CNC does not receive this information or if it receives incorrect values for these
parameters, it will stop the machining cycle.

An air jet inside the spindle shaft keeps the tool taper and the collet clean during the clamping.

The CNC unit is programmed so that the machine can only be started when the tool holder taper is correctly
engaged. If the taper is not correctly engaged the machine will not start and a fault message for the operator will be
displayed.

On request we have:
- Tool-holder crib "C" at 12 positions positioned on the operating unit (see chap. 10...)

C B

A
Author_300_01

Fig. 1

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 2/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Ejection of all or part of the workpiece (splinters)


- Ejection of all or part of the tool
- Danger caused by programming errors that could cause the tools to crash against the fixed parts.
- Danger caused by programming errors that could mean that wrong tools are called.
- Danger caused by errors in programming machine equipment (e.g. associating the wrong
parameters to a certain tool code)
- Danger due to incorrect tool fitting
- Erroneus tool is loaded when this is requested directly by the machine.
- Erroneus tool is loaded into the tool-holder store (if there is one on the machine).
- Danger of tool locking screw or ring nut slackening.

Generic programming errors, including:


- always be sure that the tool rotation direction is correct!
- pay attention to the machining depth and the tool advance speed

WARNING: always check that the shavings extractor system is connected and switched on, in
order to guarantee adequate electrospindle motor cooling.

WARNING: ENSURE THAT ELECTRO-SPINDLE IS FITTED WITH A TOOL TAPER AT ALL TIMES.
LEAVING THE SPINDLE WITHOUT A TOOL TAPER:
- will allow the entry of shavings and sawdust into the spindle
- will cause damage when the spindle is rotated

If the electro spindle is not used for various days, or it is always used with the same tool (and
therefore there is no regular change cycle for the tool ) a tool change cycle must be performed
every 3-4 days in order to prevent the tool-holding cone to remain blocked inside the electro
spindle.

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT REGULAR CLEANING AND LUBRICATING OPERATIONS BE


PERFORMED ON THE CONE AND THE ELECTRO SPINDLE AS INDICATED IN THE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 3/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN

9.28.1 Technical Characteristics


(r_6_hsk63_3.31.1a)

Toolholder attachment type HSK 63


Polarity n°4
Spindle rotation speed 1500÷24000rpm
Motor power 6,6kW (9Hp) between 12.000 rpm and 18.000 rpm
Rotation speed control from CNC via an inverter
Rotation right/left
Cooling system fanless with forced ventilation
via the suction system
Maximum tool sizes see table and fig. 2

LENGTH/DIAMETER/MAX.ROTATION SPEED REFERENCE TABLES

CAUTION: the specifications to be taken into consideration for the unit used to machine the
workpiece (electrospindle+tool) must be the minimum ones: see the table below for electrospindle
data and for the tool see the data stamped on the tool itself.

Example 1: even if, in theory, a steel tool with =100mm and H=110mm can work at 15.000 rpm (indications
marked on the tool), the electrospindle specifications may limit it to a rotation speed of 14.300 rpm.

Example 2: in the opposite case, in theory again, an electrospindle may be able to run at a rotation speed of
17.900 rpm with a steel tool measuring =80mm e H=110mm, but if the tool is marked with a max. speed of
16.000 rpm, this is the max. speed at which the spindle can turn.

Velocita massime (rpm) per elettromandrini attacco HSK63 Kw 6,6


per mandrini portautensili con pinza elastica (dimensioni H - O in mm)
Max speed (rpm) for 6,6 kW electrospindles with HSK63 chuck
for chucks with spring collets (H - O dimension in mm)

H H 110 H 120 H 130 H 140 H 150 H 160 H 170 H 180 H


Ø Ø
Ø 5 24.000 24.000 Ø5
Ø 10 24.000 24.000 24.000 Ø 10
Ø 15 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 Ø 15
Ø 20 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 Ø 20
Ø 30 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 23.000 21.800 20.700 Ø 30
Ø 40 24.000 24.000 23.700 22.300 21.000 19.700 18.400 17.300 Ø 40
Ø 50 24.000 22.700 21.100 19.500 18.100 16.900 15.700 14.600 Ø 50
Ø 60 23.800 20.400 18.700 17.200 15.800 14.600 13.500 12.600 Ø 60
Ø 70 20.400 18.400 16.700 15.200 13.900 12.800 11.800 11.000 Ø 70
Ø 80 17.900 16.600 15.000 13.600 12.400 11.400 10.500 9.700 Ø 80
Ø 90 15.900 15.100 13.500 12.200 11.100 10.200 9.400 8.700 Ø 90
Ø 100 14.300 13.800 12.300 11.100 10.100 9.200 8.500 7.800 Ø 100
Ø 110 13.000 12.700 11.300 10.200 9.300 8.500 7.800 7.200 Ø 110
Ø 120 11.900 11.700 10.400 9.300 8.500 7.700 7.100 6.500 Ø 120
Tab_rpm_em_HSK_6,6.doc

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 4/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

Ø
$-UM417b

Fig. 2

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's instructions.
Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward speeds must be selected with great care
by the operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds
must never be exceeded.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 5/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN

9.28.2 Fitting the Tools


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2)

To ensure efficient operation and a long working life of the electro-spindle, observe the following basic
precautions:

Tools must conform to "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European Standards)" standards.
Tools should be clearly marked with the maker's name and the permitted number of rpm for the tool. Do
not use non-standard tools.
These reduce electro-spindle life and may be dangerous for the operator.
a) Only work with balanced tools (balance setting Q < 1 mm/sec). Do no use unbalanced tools. Unbalanced tools
will cause irregular running and vibrations and will damage the spindle bearings.
The toolholders used have to have a balancing degree of at least G = 16 at maximum speed (vertical
cylindrical tool) (Referring to the standard rules pr EN 847-3 and ISO 1940-1)
b) Before fitting a tool, thoroughly clean the contact surfaces between the tool and the spindle using a soft cloth.
(DO NOT USE EMERY CLOTH!) Remove all traces of oil and ensure that the contact surfaces are not marked.
This will ensure good tool centring and thus reduce imbalance and vibration to the minimum.
c) Do not use force when fitting or removing a tool. Do not attempt to release the tool by knocking the spindle or
the tool spanner with a hammer. This can break the tool and cause irreparable damage to the bearings.
d) When you have finished using a tool, clean and oil the taper and threads and then store the tool in its
container.
e) Always use cutting speeds, feed speeds, tool lengths and diameters to match the machining operation.

WARNING: Permitted operating speeds are marked on the tools. Do not exceed these limits.

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Figure shows how to correctly tighten a tool on the spindle and the correct direction of feed relative to tool
rotation.

Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento


Machining with the feed direction

R Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento


Machining against the feed direction
Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento
Machining against the feed direction

$-UM371a
L Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento
Machining with the feed direction

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 6/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

9.28.2.1 Tooling up
(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2.1a)

The tool configuration is set in the tooling up phase (see user's and programming manual).
The principle identification parameters for the miller unit dimensions are shown in the figure.

WARNING: In fields N do not enter speeds of rotation which are above the maximum speeds
indicated by the tool manufacturer.

Fig. 3

D
HSK63_03

Fig. 4

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 7/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN

9.28.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2.2)

WARNING:
Fitting and removal of routers from toolholder spindles must not be performed on the machine.
The toolholder spindle must be removed from the operating unit and the cutting tools fitted or
removed at the workbench.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 45-50mm C-spanner
- 36mm open-ended spanner or clamp M (Fig. 6)

To fit tools with cylindrical fitting on the tool holder spindles, proceed as follows:
- Undo the ring nut A (Fig. 5) completely
- Select a gripper B with a bore diameter suitable for the tool fitting shank (Check the diameter marked on the
collet. The collet diameter must be the same or slightly less than the diameter of the tool shank, e.g. tool shank 20,
collet 19-20)
- Press gripper B into ring nut A
- Screw ring nut A on but without tightening
- Insert the tool C into the gripper.
- Hold the tool holder spindle still with the open-ended spanner or with the clamp M and tighten the ring nut fully
home with the C spanner
- Fit the tool holder spindle onto the electrospindle

CAUTION: Check that grub screw D is always fitted in the tool-holder spindle: if it is not fitted dust
can get into the electro-spindle and cause malfunctions and damage.

D
SK
H

B
$-CCR85

A
$-CR86

D
C
M
$-UM297a $-UM298

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 8/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

9.28.2.3 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle


(em_hsk_top_9.44.2.3)

WARNING: ON THIS MACHINE IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO MANUALLY MOUNT TOOLS ON THE


ELECTRO-SPINDLE DURING AN AUTOMATIC CYCLE.
TOOL MUST BE LOADED ON THE ELECTRO-SPINDLE EXCLUSIVELY FROM THE CNC AND TOOLS
MOUNTED ON THE COMPARTMENT AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFIC CHAPTER.

9.28.2.4 Sanding tools


(=tamponi)

With "sanding tool" we mean: tools for surface finisching, utilizing on wood working machinery, generally composed
of abrasive material reported on plastic support fixed on a metal base.

ATTENTION: This particular type of tool has to be configured in the software of


the (Xilog Plus), as "L" type tool.
See table "parameter list" (L = Sanding tool, see manual of Xilog Plus)

It's forbidden to utilize sanding tools without having configured them as "L type tool" on the
set up table of Xilog Plus SCM Group S.p.A. refuses all responsibilities for damages
caused to persons or things due to the non-observance of the indications detailed on this
manual.

ATTENTION: The rollers or sanding brushless are tools particulars, for this reason it is
recommended:- DO NOT UTILIZE TOOLS IN WHICH THERE ISN'T MARKED ON THE
MAXIMUM SPEED OF ROTATION - DO NOT TRAPASSING THE ROTATION SPEED MARKED
ON THE TOOL - DO NOT UTILIZE THIS TYPE OF TOOL FOR WORKING DIFFERENT OF THE
ONES FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED

Maximum rotation for this tool is 1500 r.p.m.


La the machine has been configured in order do not accept rotation values more the 1500
r.p.m.

For the use and maintenance of the sanding units consult the indications supplied by the constructor.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 9/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN

9.28.3 Maintenance and lubrication


(~=r_6_iso30_3.20.3)

WARNING: All cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed by skilled personnel only.
Before you start any cleaning or maintenance operations, switch off and lock out the main
electrical and compressed air switches.

Do not attempt to perform repairs or other operations not described in this manual.

This machine must only be used and maintained by suitably qualified and authorised personnel.
All operations requiring dismantling of machine components must only be performed by suitably skilled and
authorised personnel.
When changing machine parts only use original spare parts. The manufacturer declines all responsibility for
damage caused by the use of non-original spare parts.
Accident prevention regulations, safety precautions and occupational health and safety recommendations must be
followed at all times.

CAUTION!: FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THIS MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAY EFFECT MACHINING
QUALITY AND CAN INCREASE THE RISK OF TOOL BREAKAGE.

NOTE: The maintenance intervals given above are intended as a guide only. With particularly dusty
operations (e.g. machining agglomerates) the maintenance operations must be performed more
frequently to ensure continued machine efficiency.

An efficient extractor system will ensure efficient operation and prevent damage caused by
overheating. Check the efficiency of the sawdust/shaving extractor system once a week.

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 10/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.3ac)

Every 50 hours: lubricate the tool taper clamping unit with the grease spray provide (code: 0002400035C).

Unload the tool in the tools crib


Move the operator unit to an accessible position.
Insert the spray can tube in the gap between two of the collet sections (see the figure 21) and, holding the can in a
vertical position, spray.
repeat the operation for the other gaps.

cod. 0002400035C

50h
$-UM487

Fig. 21

In order to uniformly distribute the grease between the "collets", put the machine back in "MANUAL" mode and
perform 10-15 cone blocking and releasing actions (see fig. 22).

Fig. 22

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 11/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN
Insert an empty cone and have the electric spindle rotate at 18000 rpm for about a minute (see fig. 23).

Fig. 23

At the end, stop the machine again, extract the tool cone and eliminate any grease deposited on the inside walls of
the electric spindle shaft with a cloth and, if necessary, with acetone (WARNING: ACETONE IS A FLAMMABLE
LIQUID!) (see fig. 24)
Also clean the hollow part of the tool cone (see fig. 25).

Fig. 24 Fig. 25

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 12/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional)

Clean the cone outside and inside with a dry and clean cloth every week.

Every month clean the contact surfaces (shown in grey in the figure 26) between the tool tapers and the chuck
using acetone (CAUTION! FIRE HAZARD). Next, lubricate this area with the Teflub lubricant supplied (SCM:
0002400034A) Teflub is a dry, dustproof, waterproof lubricant which ensures correct clamping of the tool tapers.

NOTE: On tool holder tapers not supplied by manufacturer, perform this operation the first time the
tapers are used.

IMPORTANT: AS WELL AS OBSERVING THE WARNINGS ON THE CANISTER:


- DO NOT INHALE VAPOURS OR NEBULISED SUBSTANCES
- MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA USED IS WELL VENTILATED
- WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES IF CONTACT IS PROLONGED
- WEAR EYE PROTECTION

HSK63_05

Fig. 26

WARNING: If the machine remains switched off for a long period of time (more than one week), the
cone that stays mounted on the electro spindle must be carefully cleaned and lubricated.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 13/14
AUTHOR 330
9.28 - HSK 63 connection 6,6Kw (9Hp) Electric spindle - Rel. 1.0 (Optional) EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 9.28 - Pag. 14/14 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

INDEX

9.44 7,5/11kw (10/15Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector.......................................3

9.44.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................5

9.44.1.1 Toolholder spindle with "ER32" collet for tools with cylindrical hold ....................6

9.44.1.2 Toolholder spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools .........................................7

9.44.2 Fitting the Tools .................................................................................................12

9.44.2.1 Tooling up..........................................................................................................13

9.44.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting ......................14

9.44.2.3 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools ..............15

9.44.2.4 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle .....................................................................16

9.44.2.5 Sanding tools.....................................................................................................16

9.44.3 Maintenance and lubrication..............................................................................17

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance..................................................18

9.44.3.1 Heat exchanger .................................................................................................21

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 1/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 2/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44 7,5/11kw (10/15Hp) Electric spindle HSK63 connector


(em_hsk_top_1.0_9.44)

This operating unit is equipped with one electro-spindle A (fig. 1) for tools with HSK63 attachment installed on a
support/slide B:
All movements involve sliding on prismatic guides with recirculating ball screws. The movements are made
possible using top quality recirculating ball screws.

The electro-spindle has a clamping system designed for DIN 69893 type tool tapers. A spring-loaded tie-rod inside
the spindle ensures a perfect clamping fit between the tapers and guarantees full transmission of all motor power
to the tool.
Microswitches are triggered to inform the CNC unit if the tool is clamped or released and if the electro-spindle is
stopped or rotating. If the CNC does not receive this information or if it receives incorrect values for these
parameters, it will stop the machining cycle.

An air jet inside the spindle shaft keeps the tool taper and the collet clean during the clamping.

The CNC unit is programmed so that the machine can only be started when the tool holder taper is correctly
engaged. If the taper is not correctly engaged the machine will not start and a fault message for the operator will be
displayed.

As optional you can install the following cribs:


- Tool-holder crib "C" at 12 positions positioned on the operating unit (see chap. 10...)
- Tool-holder crib "tool room" "D" at 12 positions positioned on the mobile support (ONLY ON THE SERIES 6xx -
see chap. 10...)

D A

Author_top_A632_01a

Fig. 1

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 3/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Ejection of all or part of the workpiece (splinters)


- Ejection of all or part of the tool
- Danger caused by programming errors that could cause the tools to crash against the fixed parts.
- Danger caused by programming errors that could mean that wrong tools are called.
- Danger caused by errors in programming machine equipment (e.g. associating the wrong
parameters to a certain tool code)
- Danger due to incorrect tool fitting
- Erroneus tool is loaded when this is requested directly by the machine.
- Erroneus tool is loaded into the tool-holder store (if there is one on the machine).
- Danger of tool locking screw or ring nut slackening.

Generic programming errors, including:


- always be sure that the tool rotation direction is correct!
- pay attention to the machining depth and the tool advance speed

WARNING: always check that the shavings extractor system is connected and switched on, in
order to guarantee adequate electrospindle motor cooling.

WARNING: ENSURE THAT ELECTRO-SPINDLE IS FITTED WITH A TOOL TAPER AT ALL TIMES.
LEAVING THE SPINDLE WITHOUT A TOOL TAPER:
- will allow the entry of shavings and sawdust into the spindle
- will cause damage when the spindle is rotated

If the electro spindle is not used for various days, or it is always used with the same tool (and
therefore there is no regular change cycle for the tool ) a tool change cycle must be performed
every 3-4 days in order to prevent the tool-holding cone to remain blocked inside the electro
spindle.

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT REGULAR CLEANING AND LUBRICATING OPERATIONS BE


PERFORMED ON THE CONE AND THE ELECTRO SPINDLE AS INDICATED IN THE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER.

NOTE: the 15HP (11Kw) version is optional

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 4/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.1 Technical Characteristics


(em_hsk_top_2.0_9.44.1)

Toolholder attachment type HSK 63


Polarity n°4
Spindle rotation speed 1500÷18000rpm
Motor power 7.5kW (10Hp) between 11.000 rpm and 18.000 rpm
Motor power 11kW (15Hp) between 11.000 rpm and 18.000 rpm
Rotation speed control from CNC via an inverter
Rotation right/left
Cooling system (7.5kW) fanless with forced ventilation
via the suction system
Cooling system (11kW) with liquid
Maximum tool sizes see table and fig. 2

LENGTH/DIAMETER/MAX.ROTATION SPEED REFERENCE TABLES

In the following chapters are reproduced the charts referred to the two toolholders types:

- TOOLHOLDER SPINDLE WITH "ER32" COLLET FOR TOOLS WITH CYLINDRICAL HOLD
- TOOLHOLDER SPINDLE WITH Ø30mm SHAFT FOR BORED TOOLS

CAUTION: the specifications to be taken into consideration for the unit used to machine the
workpiece (electrospindle+tool) must be the minimum ones: see the table below for electrospindle
data and for the tool see the data stamped on the tool itself.

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's instructions.

Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward speeds must be selected with great care
by the operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds
must never be exceeded.

Example 1: even if, in theory, a steel tool with =100mm and H=110mm can work at 15.000 rpm (indications
marked on the tool), the electrospindle specifications may limit it to a rotation speed of 14.300 rpm.

Example 2: in the opposite case, in theory again, an electrospindle may be able to run at a rotation speed of
17.900 rpm with a steel tool measuring =80mm e H=110mm, but if the tool is marked with a max. speed of
16.000 rpm, this is the max. speed at which the spindle can turn.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 5/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

9.44.1.1 Toolholder spindle with "ER32" collet for tools with cylindrical
hold
(em_tr12_al7467_9.48s.1.1)

Velocita massime (rpm) per elettromandrini attacco HSK63 Kw 6,6


per mandrini portautensili con pinza elastica (dimensioni H - O in mm)
Max speed (rpm) for 6,6 kW electrospindles with HSK63 chuck
for chucks with spring collets (H - O dimension in mm)

H H 110 H 120 H 130 H 140 H 150 H 160 H 170 H 180 H


Ø Ø
Ø 5 18.000 18.000 Ø5
Ø 10 18.000 18.000 18.000 Ø 10
Ø 15 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 Ø 15
Ø 20 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 Ø 20
Ø 30 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 Ø 30
Ø 40 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 Ø 40
Ø 50 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 17.000 16.000 Ø 50
Ø 60 18.000 18.000 18.000 18.000 17.100 15.900 14.800 13.800 Ø 60
Ø 70 18.000 18.000 17.900 16.400 15.100 14.000 13.000 12.100 Ø 70
Ø 80 17.900 17.800 16.100 14.700 13.500 12.400 11.500 10.700 Ø 80
Ø 90 15.900 15.900 14.600 13.300 12.200 11.200 10.300 9.600 Ø 90
Ø 100 14.300 14.300 13.300 12.100 11.000 10.100 9.300 8.700 Ø 100
Ø 110 13.000 13.000 12.300 11.100 10.100 9.300 8.600 7.900 Ø 110
Ø 120 11.900 11.900 11.300 10.200 9.300 8.500 7.800 7.300 Ø 120
Tab_rpm_em_HSK_7,5-11.eps

Ø
$-UM417b

Fig. 2

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 6/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.1.2 Toolholder spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools


(em_hsk_top_2.0_9.44.1.2)

Elettromandrino / Electrospindle Power 2000


Offset = 20 [mm]
Utensile / Tool "Fe" (acciaio/steel) D[mm]
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17791
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17806 16662 15616 14658 offset Ø30mm
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17084 15893 14816 13840 12955 12148 L
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 16595 15273 14106 13072 12152 11329 10589
60 18000 18000 18000 16974 15524 14250 13128 12137 11258 10474 9773 9141
70 18000 18000 17537 15790 14300 13025 11927 10973 10139 9404 8751 8169
80 18000 18000 16480 14669 13172 11920 10861 9954 9169 8484 7881 7345
90 18000 16045 14259 12770 11522 10467 9566 8789 8113 7520 6995 6528
100 17717 15343 13454 11933 10691 9660 8793 8053 7416 6861 6373 5941 D
110 15028 13205 11703 10463 9429 8559 7819 7182 6629 6145 5718 5338
120 14661 12662 11088 9828 8801 7952 7239 6631 6108 5653 5254 4900
130 14272 12115 10488 9222 8213 7391 6708 6131 5638 5211 4838 4509
140 12187 10535 9231 8188 7337 6633 6042 5538 5105 4727 4396 4103
150 11887 10112 8768 7720 6883 6199 5631 5151 4740 4385 4074 3799
160 10211 8847 7765 6897 6187 5598 5103 4682 4318 4002 3724 3479
170 9979 8518 7404 6531 5830 5257 4780 4377 4031 3732 3470 3239
180 9737 8189 7051 6181 5494 4939 4480 4095 3767 3484 3237 3020
190 8454 7244 6313 5579 4988 4504 4099 3756 3463 3208 2985 2788
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Al" (alluminio-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17204 16277
60 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17430 16484 15593 14756 13972
70 18000 18000 18000 18000 19714 18489 17343 16278 15291 14380 13540 12764
80 18000 18000 18000 18000 18838 17501 16283 15176 14173 13262 12433 11678
90 18000 18000 18000 17318 16159 15084 14094 13186 12356 11596 10901 10264
100 18000 18000 18000 16746 15473 14324 13290 12362 11527 10774 10094 9476
110 17602 16461 15346 14288 13304 12399 11571 10816 10128 9502 8930 8407
120 17689 16314 15023 13842 12774 11816 10959 10191 9502 8882 8323 7816
130 17789 16152 14680 13379 12238 11239 10363 9592 8909 8301 7759 7271
140 14695 13556 12489 11513 10631 9840 9131 8497 7928 7416 6954 6536
150 14773 13431 12223 11155 10217 9395 8672 8035 7470 6967 6518 6114
160 12265 11336 10461 9658 8930 8276 7689 7162 6689 6263 5878 5530
170 12324 11239 10256 9381 8609 7930 7330 6801 6331 5911 5536 5198
180 12392 11135 10040 9098 8287 7588 6982 6453 5989 5579 5214 4888
190 10366 9487 8683 7963 7323 6757 6257 5813 5418 5065 4748 4463
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Fe-Al" (acciaio-alluminio/steel-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17572 16559
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 16565 15549 14613 13751
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17071 15856 14761 13774 12881 12071
60 18000 18000 18000 18000 17064 15793 14649 13619 12690 11852 11094 10404
70 18000 18000 18000 17375 15884 14573 13421 12405 11505 10703 9986 9340
80 18000 18000 18000 16308 14764 13443 12306 11320 10459 9700 9028 8427
90 18000 17278 15584 14114 12845 11746 10791 9955 9220 8570 7990 7470
100 18000 16695 14847 13303 12008 10911 9974 9167 8464 7847 7302 6817
110 15905 14248 12811 11579 10521 9611 8824 8137 7535 7003 6530 6107
120 15662 13792 12243 10959 9886 8981 8209 7545 6969 6463 6017 5620
130 15397 13320 11676 10356 9280 8388 7639 7001 6451 5973 5553 5181
140 13012 11465 10184 9122 8234 7484 6846 6296 5818 5400 5030 4702
150 12807 11100 9746 8656 7766 7027 6405 5875 5418 5020 4671 4362
160 10886 9613 8554 7672 6933 6309 5776 5316 4917 4567 4258 3982
170 10727 9330 8213 7309 6567 5950 5430 4985 4602 4268 3974 3714
180 10558 9040 7874 6956 6217 5611 5105 4677 4311 3992 3714 3468
190 9066 7916 6988 6232 5609 5089 4649 4273 3948 3665 3415 3194
L[mm]

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 7/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

Elettromandrino / Electrospindle Power 2000


Offset = 40 [mm]
Utensile / Tool "Fe" (acciaio/steel) D[mm]
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17755 16750 15810 14932
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17219 16023 14941 13960 13068 12257 offset Ø30mm
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 16648 15400 14277 13268 12360 11541 10800 10127 L
50 18000 18000 18000 16620 15151 13872 12753 11772 10906 10137 9451 8835
60 18000 18000 17101 15316 13815 12545 11460 10525 9712 8998 8368 7806
70 18000 16367 14638 13172 11928 10866 9953 9161 8468 7859 7318 6836
80 17907 15620 13765 12252 11005 9963 9082 8329 7677 7109 6608 6164
90 15135 13369 11895 10665 9632 8758 8012 7367 6807 6315 5880 5492
100 14759 12804 11246 9990 8961 8107 7386 6772 6242 5781 5375 5015 D
110 14362 12237 10618 9353 8339 7511 6821 6238 5740 5307 4929 4595
120 12238 10609 9315 8273 7422 6715 6121 5614 5177 4796 4462 4165
130 11934 10176 8837 7790 6950 6264 5693 5209 4796 4437 4124 3847
140 10238 8886 7810 6943 6233 5644 5147 4724 4359 4041 3761 3514
150 10004 8553 7442 6569 5868 5294 4815 4410 4063 3762 3499 3266
160 9759 8220 7083 6213 5525 4968 4508 4121 3792 3508 3260 3042
170 8467 7263 6334 5601 5010 4525 4119 3776 3481 3226 3002 2805
180 8278 7003 6052 5319 4738 4266 3875 3546 3265 3023 2811 2625
190 7236 6229 5445 4823 4320 3906 3559 3265 3013 2794 2602 2432
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Al" (alluminio-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17583 16732 15918 15143
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17107 16146 15247 14407 13624
60 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 16919 15832 14834 13920 13082 12313
70 18000 18000 18000 17582 16482 15447 14484 13593 12770 12013 11315 10672
80 18000 18000 18000 16981 15751 14629 13610 12689 11854 11098 10412 9787
90 17579 16504 15442 14424 13469 12584 11769 11021 10337 9712 9139 8613
100 17666 16356 15113 13964 12918 11973 11123 10358 9670 9049 8487 7977
110 17765 16192 14762 13487 12362 11371 10499 9727 9043 8433 7887 7396
120 14683 13578 12536 11576 10706 9922 9218 8586 8018 7505 7042 6622
130 14761 13452 12266 11212 10283 9465 8744 8108 7543 7039 6588 6183
140 12259 11347 10486 9692 8971 8321 7736 7211 6739 6313 5927 5578
150 12318 11250 10279 9412 8645 7968 7371 6841 6371 5952 5576 5237
160 12386 11145 10062 9125 8318 7621 7016 6487 6023 5612 5246 4919
170 10363 9493 8696 7980 7343 6779 6280 5836 5441 5088 4772 4486
180 10414 9413 8528 7757 7088 6507 6001 5557 5166 4819 4510 4233
190 8800 8087 7428 6832 6299 5824 5403 5028 4693 4393 4124 3880
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Fe-Al" (acciaio-alluminio/steel-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17559 16666
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17816 16709 15688 14748 13881
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 16915 15802 14779 13842 12984 12197 11475
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 16719 15431 14280 13250 12329 11501 10754 10078
60 18000 18000 18000 16942 15419 14097 12947 11940 11055 10270 9572 8946
70 18000 17546 15931 14504 13254 12160 11201 10356 9609 8944 8350 7815
80 18000 16935 15143 13624 12335 11235 10290 9471 8755 8126 7568 7070
90 15979 14389 12991 11778 10730 9822 9032 8341 7732 7193 6713 6282
100 15733 13919 12398 11126 10056 9149 8373 7703 7120 6608 6156 5752
110 15466 13434 11809 10495 9418 8523 7768 7124 6569 6085 5660 5283
120 13052 11534 10268 9212 8326 7576 6935 6383 5902 5480 5107 4775
130 12845 11163 9819 8733 7842 7101 6477 5944 5484 5083 4731 4419
140 10909 9652 8601 7723 6986 6361 5827 5366 4965 4613 4302 4025
150 10750 9366 8255 7353 6611 5993 5472 5026 4641 4305 4010 3748
160 10580 9073 7911 6994 6254 5647 5140 4710 4342 4023 3743 3496
170 9080 7937 7013 6258 5636 5115 4675 4298 3972 3688 3437 3216
180 8949 7710 6744 5976 5354 4841 4412 4047 3734 3462 3224 3014
190 7743 6792 6017 5380 4852 4409 4034 3712 3434 3190 2976 2786
L[mm]

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 8/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

Elettromandrino / Electrospindle Power 2000


Offset = 60 [mm]
Utensile / Tool "Fe" (acciaio/steel) D[mm]
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17686 16952 16236
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17816 16773 15794 14880 14028 13236 12501
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 16798 15552 14428 13417 12506 11684 10940 10264 offset Ø30mm
40 18000 18000 18000 16500 15019 13734 12615 11636 10775 10013 9334 8726 L
50 18000 16911 15297 13886 12659 11594 10664 9849 9131 8494 7926 7416
60 18000 16087 14302 12811 11562 10505 9604 8827 8152 7560 7037 6571
70 15312 13646 12222 11014 9986 9108 8352 7696 7122 6617 6168 5768
80 14922 13044 11518 10270 9239 8376 7645 7019 6478 6005 5588 5218
90 14510 12443 10842 9577 8557 7719 7019 6426 5917 5475 5088 4747
100 12324 10735 9457 8421 7568 6858 6257 5745 5302 4915 4575 4274 D
110 12013 10285 8956 7910 7067 6376 5799 5311 4892 4529 4211 3930
120 10284 8955 7888 7024 6314 5722 5223 4796 4428 4107 3825 3575
130 10046 8613 7508 6636 5934 5357 4875 4467 4117 3814 3548 3314
140 9799 8272 7139 6268 5578 5019 4556 4167 3835 3549 3299 3079
150 8491 7297 6372 5640 5048 4561 4154 3810 3514 3257 3032 2833
160 8300 7033 6085 5352 4769 4296 3903 3573 3291 3047 2835 2647
170 7250 6249 5467 4846 4343 3928 3580 3286 3032 2812 2620 2450
180 7101 6040 5240 4617 4120 3715 3379 3096 2854 2644 2461 2300
190 6946 5832 5018 4398 3910 3516 3192 2920 2688 2489 2315 2163
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Al" (alluminio-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17616
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17759 16915 16106 15335
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17017 16050 15146 14305 13522
50 18000 18000 18000 18000 17023 16068 15161 14307 13507 12760 12064 11416
60 18000 18000 18000 17370 16219 15148 14161 13256 12428 11671 10977 10342
70 17542 16573 15599 14651 13747 12898 12107 11375 10699 10077 9503 8974
80 17628 16423 15260 14167 13159 12239 11403 10646 9960 9337 8772 8256
90 17726 16258 14898 13668 12570 11595 10729 9960 9274 8661 8110 7612
100 14663 13614 12614 11684 10834 10063 9366 8738 8171 7659 7194 6771
110 14740 13487 12339 11309 10394 9585 8868 8233 7668 7163 6709 6301
120 12248 11366 10528 9750 9040 8398 7818 7295 6824 6398 6012 5662
130 12307 11269 10318 9465 8706 8034 7440 6912 6442 6022 5644 5304
140 12375 11163 10098 9173 8372 7678 7074 6546 6081 5669 5302 4974
150 10357 9504 8718 8010 7378 6817 6320 5877 5482 5129 4812 4526
160 10409 9423 8548 7784 7119 6540 6035 5591 5200 4853 4543 4266
170 8797 8093 7440 6849 6319 5847 5427 5052 4718 4418 4148 3905
180 8837 8030 7308 6672 6115 5628 5201 4825 4492 4197 3933 3697
190 8881 7963 7170 6492 5911 5412 4981 4606 4278 3988 3731 3501
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Fe-Al" (acciaio-alluminio/steel-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17632
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17255 16366 15522 14723 13970
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17073 15962 14941 14003 13143 12355 11630
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 16607 15309 14152 13122 12201 11377 10636 9966
50 18000 17983 16514 15175 13972 12897 11939 11084 10319 9633 9015 8456
60 18000 17327 15639 14171 12901 11801 10845 10010 9275 8625 8046 7527
70 16096 14618 13289 12115 11085 10183 9391 8692 8074 7524 7032 6590
80 15845 14126 12655 11405 10343 9434 8652 7974 7381 6859 6395 5982
90 15573 13619 12028 10726 9649 8749 7986 7333 6769 6275 5841 5456
100 13113 11645 10405 9361 8479 7729 7085 6528 6042 5614 5236 4899
110 12904 11263 9938 8858 7968 7225 6596 6059 5594 5189 4832 4515
120 10943 9714 8678 7807 7072 6447 5911 5448 5044 4689 4376 4096
130 10783 9423 8322 7424 6683 6064 5540 5092 4704 4366 4068 3804
140 10612 9125 7970 7055 6315 5706 5196 4764 4393 4072 3790 3541
150 9100 7971 7053 6301 5679 5158 4716 4338 4011 3725 3473 3250
160 8968 7740 6779 6013 5390 4877 4446 4080 3766 3493 3253 3042
170 7756 6813 6041 5406 4879 4436 4060 3737 3458 3214 2998 2808
180 7653 6632 5825 5177 4649 4211 3844 3531 3261 3027 2822 2640
190 7545 6449 5611 4956 4429 3999 3641 3338 3079 2854 2658 2485
L[mm]

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 9/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

Elettromandrino / Electrospindle Power 2000


Offset = 80 [mm]
Utensile / Tool "Fe" (acciaio/steel) D[mm]
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17853 17004 16187 15407 14664
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 17546 16328 15213 14198 13275 12435 11671 10973
30 18000 17835 16472 15210 14060 13022 12088 11249 10495 9814 9199 8641 offset Ø30mm
40 18000 16876 15245 13823 12591 11523 10595 9783 9068 8436 7873 7369 L
50 15597 14108 12783 11624 10614 9735 8967 8293 7698 7171 6699 6277
60 15185 13443 11979 10754 9723 8849 8102 7458 6896 6404 5968 5580
70 14750 12784 11219 9960 8931 8079 7362 6751 6225 5768 5366 5010
80 12464 10944 9696 8670 7817 7100 6491 5968 5515 5119 4770 4460
90 12141 10467 9156 8112 7265 6566 5981 5483 5056 4684 4359 4071
100 10361 9068 8018 7159 6449 5854 5350 4919 4546 4219 3932 3677 D
110 10117 8713 7618 6748 6043 5463 4977 4564 4209 3902 3632 3393
120 9863 8359 7232 6360 5667 5104 4637 4244 3908 3618 3364 3141
130 8531 7354 6435 5704 5112 4623 4214 3866 3568 3308 3081 2880
140 8337 7083 6139 5406 4822 4346 3951 3619 3334 3089 2874 2685
150 7273 6282 5505 4885 4381 3965 3616 3320 3065 2844 2650 2479
160 7122 6070 5272 4650 4152 3746 3409 3124 2880 2670 2486 2323
170 6966 5859 5046 4426 3937 3542 3216 2943 2710 2510 2335 2182
180 6144 5254 4573 4040 3612 3262 2971 2724 2513 2331 2171 2031
190 6021 5086 4392 3859 3438 3096 2814 2577 2375 2201 2049 1915
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Al" (alluminio-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17694 16913 16160
30 18000 18000 18000 18000 17934 17144 16366 15608 14877 14176 13507 12871
40 18000 18000 18000 18000 17000 16038 15126 14268 13466 12719 12024 11379
50 17485 16681 15850 15018 14205 13424 12682 11984 11329 10717 10147 9616
60 17569 16528 15493 14497 13557 12683 11876 11135 10456 9834 9264 8742
70 17667 16359 15114 13962 12913 11966 11116 10352 9666 9048 8489 7983
80 14631 13671 12739 11859 11043 10295 9613 8992 8429 7916 7449 7022
90 14708 13542 12456 11466 10577 9783 9074 8442 7876 7369 6912 6498
100 12231 11398 10596 9846 9155 8525 7952 7434 6965 6539 6152 5800
110 12290 11300 10383 9552 8807 8144 7554 7028 6558 6137 5758 5416
120 12357 11193 10158 9251 8461 7772 7171 6643 6177 5763 5395 5064
130 10347 9521 8754 8059 7436 6880 6386 5945 5550 5197 4879 4592
140 10399 9439 8582 7829 7170 6595 6091 5648 5257 4909 4599 4320
150 8792 8103 7461 6878 6353 5884 5466 5093 4759 4459 4189 3945
160 8831 8040 7328 6698 6146 5661 5235 4860 4527 4232 3967 3730
170 8875 7972 7189 6516 5938 5441 5011 4636 4307 4017 3759 3529
180 7571 6914 6318 5788 5320 4907 4544 4223 3938 3684 3457 3253
190 7605 6861 6209 5643 5155 4732 4364 4043 3761 3511 3289 3090
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Fe-Al" (acciaio-alluminio/steel-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17619 16873 16150
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17818 16740 15734 14800 13935 13135 12396
30 18000 18000 17512 16370 15294 14292 13368 12520 11744 11032 10381 9783
40 18000 17962 16478 15127 13916 12836 11876 11022 10260 9577 8963 8409
50 16277 14988 13784 12686 11698 10814 10025 9320 8689 8123 7612 7149
60 16018 14458 13078 11875 10831 9925 9136 8445 7837 7297 6817 6386
70 15737 13915 12387 11110 10038 9131 8357 7690 7110 6602 6153 5753
80 13208 11823 10629 9607 8733 7983 7334 6770 6276 5841 5454 5108
90 12995 11424 10130 9063 8175 7429 6794 6249 5777 5363 4999 4675
100 10996 9812 8801 7942 7211 6587 6049 5582 5174 4815 4496 4212
110 10835 9512 8430 7539 6800 6179 5652 5200 4808 4466 4164 3896
120 10662 9206 8064 7152 6412 5800 5287 4851 4476 4151 3865 3613
130 9130 8023 7116 6368 5747 5225 4782 4402 4072 3784 3530 3305
140 8997 7788 6835 6071 5448 4933 4501 4133 3816 3541 3299 3086
150 7774 6845 6079 5447 4921 4477 4100 3777 3496 3250 3034 2842
160 7671 6662 5859 5213 4685 4247 3878 3564 3293 3058 2851 2668
170 7562 6476 5642 4987 4461 4029 3670 3366 3105 2880 2683 2509
180 6604 5754 5074 4522 4070 3693 3376 3105 2871 2667 2488 2330
190 6518 5607 4900 4341 3889 3517 3207 2944 2718 2523 2351 2200
L[mm]

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 10/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

Elettromandrino / Electrospindle Power 2000


Offset = 100 [mm]
Utensile / Tool "Fe" (acciaio/steel) D[mm]
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 17980 17216 16454 15703 14974 14270 13596 12954 12343
20 18000 18000 16997 15820 14721 13711 12788 11948 11185 10491 9860 9283
30 16045 14877 13765 12734 11793 10941 10174 9484 8861 8300 7791 7329 offset Ø30mm
40 15597 14103 12773 11610 10599 9720 8953 8281 7688 7163 6695 6275 L
50 15127 13346 11860 10624 9590 8719 7976 7338 6784 6298 5870 5490
60 12684 11282 10093 9089 8239 7515 6894 6356 5887 5474 5109 4783
70 12343 10760 9484 8448 7597 6887 6287 5775 5334 4948 4610 4310
80 10481 9251 8230 7382 6672 6073 5562 5123 4741 4406 4110 3848
90 10229 8873 7797 6931 6224 5637 5143 4723 4361 4046 3769 3524
100 9966 8499 7383 6511 5813 5243 4769 4369 4026 3730 3471 3243 D
110 8594 7446 6538 5809 5215 4723 4310 3958 3655 3392 3161 2956
120 8396 7164 6226 5494 4907 4428 4029 3693 3405 3155 2937 2745
130 7310 6336 5566 4947 4443 4025 3674 3375 3118 2895 2698 2525
140 7157 6118 5325 4703 4204 3796 3456 3169 2923 2711 2525 2361
150 6998 5902 5092 4471 3980 3583 3255 2980 2745 2543 2367 2212
160 6165 5283 4606 4073 3645 3293 3001 2753 2541 2357 2196 2055
170 6041 5112 4421 3888 3465 3123 2839 2601 2398 2222 2069 1935
180 5361 4606 4023 3562 3191 2885 2631 2415 2230 2070 1930 1806
190 5261 4468 3873 3412 3045 2746 2499 2290 2113 1959 1825 1707
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Al" (alluminio-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17784 17319 16846 16369
20 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17623 16915 16214 15528 14862 14218 13600
30 17402 16841 16236 15604 14961 14319 13687 13071 12476 11906 11362 10844
40 17485 16684 15854 15022 14209 13428 12686 11988 11334 10724 10156 9628
50 17581 16510 15448 14428 13470 12583 11768 11023 10342 9721 9154 8635
60 14583 13758 12934 12136 11380 10673 10018 9414 8859 8348 7879 7448
70 14659 13626 12637 11715 10870 10103 9410 8785 8220 7710 7248 6828
80 12204 11446 10704 9997 9337 8728 8170 7660 7194 6769 6381 6026
90 12262 11347 10483 9689 8968 8320 7738 7216 6747 6324 5942 5597
100 12329 11238 10251 9374 8602 7923 7326 6798 6331 5915 5543 5209
110 10332 9547 8811 8137 7528 6981 6491 6052 5659 5305 4986 4696
120 10383 9465 8636 7900 7252 6682 6181 5739 5347 4999 4686 4406
130 8783 8118 7495 6924 6408 5944 5529 5157 4824 4524 4253 4008
140 8822 8055 7360 6741 6194 5713 5290 4915 4583 4286 4021 3783
150 8866 7987 7219 6555 5982 5487 5058 4683 4354 4063 3804 3573
160 7565 6923 6337 5814 5350 4940 4578 4258 3973 3719 3491 3286
170 7599 6870 6227 5667 5182 4761 4394 4073 3790 3540 3317 3118
180 6546 6005 5508 5062 4664 4313 4001 3724 3478 3258 3061 2883
190 6573 5963 5420 4944 4529 4168 3852 3574 3330 3113 2919 2745
L[mm]

Utensile / Tool "Fe-Al" (acciaio-alluminio/steel-alluminium) D[mm]


50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
10 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17382 16723 16066 15419 14786 14172 13577
20 18000 18000 17946 16907 15904 14951 14058 13225 12454 11740 11081 10472
30 16550 15579 14614 13684 12805 11987 11231 10535 9898 9313 8777 8284
40 16279 14988 13780 12679 11689 10805 10016 9312 8683 8119 7610 7151
50 15985 14385 12977 11758 10706 9798 9010 8323 7720 7187 6713 6289
60 13351 12103 10988 10009 9155 8410 7757 7184 6678 6229 5827 5467
70 13132 11674 10439 9397 8516 7766 7123 6567 6082 5656 5279 4943
80 11077 9966 8996 8159 7437 6814 6273 5801 5387 5020 4694 4402
90 10912 9652 8600 7723 6987 6364 5832 5374 4976 4626 4318 4043
100 10735 9332 8212 7307 6566 5951 5432 4990 4609 4278 3987 3729
110 9175 8104 7214 6474 5855 5333 4887 4503 4170 3878 3620 3391
120 9040 7862 6921 6162 5540 5023 4587 4216 3895 3617 3372 3155
130 7801 6893 6139 5511 4986 4542 4164 3839 3556 3308 3089 2895
140 7697 6706 5912 5269 4741 4302 3931 3615 3343 3105 2896 2712
150 7588 6517 5689 5036 4509 4076 3714 3409 3146 2919 2720 2544
160 6621 5782 5107 4558 4106 3728 3410 3138 2903 2698 2518 2358
170 6535 5633 4930 4372 3920 3547 3236 2972 2745 2548 2376 2224
180 5747 5033 4454 3981 3590 3263 2986 2750 2545 2367 2210 2071
190 5679 4913 4311 3830 3439 3116 2845 2614 2416 2245 2094 1961
L[mm]

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 11/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

9.44.2 Fitting the Tools


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2)

To ensure efficient operation and a long working life of the electro-spindle, observe the following basic
precautions:

Tools must conform to "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003 (European Standards)" standards.
Tools should be clearly marked with the maker's name and the permitted number of rpm for the tool. Do
not use non-standard tools.
These reduce electro-spindle life and may be dangerous for the operator.
a) Only work with balanced tools (balance setting Q < 1 mm/sec). Do no use unbalanced tools. Unbalanced tools
will cause irregular running and vibrations and will damage the spindle bearings.
The toolholders used have to have a balancing degree of at least G = 16 at maximum speed (vertical
cylindrical tool) (Referring to the standard rules pr EN 847-3 and ISO 1940-1)
b) Before fitting a tool, thoroughly clean the contact surfaces between the tool and the spindle using a soft cloth.
(DO NOT USE EMERY CLOTH!) Remove all traces of oil and ensure that the contact surfaces are not marked.
This will ensure good tool centring and thus reduce imbalance and vibration to the minimum.
c) Do not use force when fitting or removing a tool. Do not attempt to release the tool by knocking the spindle or
the tool spanner with a hammer. This can break the tool and cause irreparable damage to the bearings.
d) When you have finished using a tool, clean and oil the taper and threads and then store the tool in its
container.
e) Always use cutting speeds, feed speeds, tool lengths and diameters to match the machining operation.

WARNING: Permitted operating speeds are marked on the tools. Do not exceed these limits.

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Figure shows how to correctly tighten a tool on the spindle and the correct direction of feed relative to tool
rotation.

Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento


Machining with the feed direction

R Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento


Machining against the feed direction
Lavorazione contro l'avanzamento
Machining against the feed direction

$-UM371a
L Lavorazione a favore dell'avanzamento
Machining with the feed direction

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 12/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.2.1 Tooling up
(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2.1a)

The tool configuration is set in the tooling up phase (see user's and programming manual).
The principle identification parameters for the miller unit dimensions are shown in the figure.

WARNING: In fields N do not enter speeds of rotation which are above the maximum speeds
indicated by the tool manufacturer.

Fig. 3

D
HSK63_03

Fig. 4

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 13/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

9.44.2.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.2.2)

WARNING:
Fitting and removal of routers from toolholder spindles must not be performed on the machine.
The toolholder spindle must be removed from the operating unit and the cutting tools fitted or
removed at the workbench.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 45-50mm C-spanner
- 36mm open-ended spanner or clamp M (Fig. 6)

To fit tools with cylindrical fitting on the tool holder spindles, proceed as follows:
- Undo the ring nut A (Fig. 5) completely
- Select a gripper B with a bore diameter suitable for the tool fitting shank (Check the diameter marked on the
collet. The collet diameter must be the same or slightly less than the diameter of the tool shank, e.g. tool shank 20,
collet 19-20)
- Press gripper B into ring nut A
- Screw ring nut A on but without tightening
- Insert the tool C into the gripper.
- Hold the tool holder spindle still with the open-ended spanner or with the clamp M and tighten the ring nut fully
home with the C spanner
- Fit the tool holder spindle onto the electrospindle

CAUTION: Check that grub screw D is always fitted in the tool-holder spindle: if it is not fitted dust
can get into the electro-spindle and cause malfunctions and damage.

D
SK
H

B
$-CCR85

A
$-CR86

D
C
M
$-UM297a $-UM298

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 14/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.2.3 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored
tools
(em_tr12_al7467_9.47s.2.3)

WARNING:
Fitting and removal of routers from toolholder spindles must not be performed on the machine.
The toolholder spindle must be removed from the operating unit and the cutting tools fitted or
removed at the workbench.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- spanner E
- clamp M

Put in the toolholder spindle shaft the spacers A and the tool (or the series of tools) B till the "tools pack" is created,
then block with the flange C - C1 through the screws D.

ATTENTION: VERIFY THAT THE FLANGE "C" CLAMPS CORRECTLY THE TOOLS PACK: IN
PARTICULAR IT DOESN'T HAVE TO LAY ON THE SHAFT INFERIOR FACE OR IT DOESN'T HAVE
TO REMAIN OUT OF THE SHAFT.

A = distanziale / spacer
B = utensile / tool

B A M

A
E

D C C1

A OK
B
1 ÷ 2 mm

A NO NO
1 ÷ 2 mm

NO NO
$-UM539

Fig. 5

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 15/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

9.44.2.4 Mounting Tools on Electrospindle


(em_hsk_top_9.44.2.3)

WARNING: ON THIS MACHINE IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO MANUALLY MOUNT TOOLS ON THE


ELECTRO-SPINDLE DURING AN AUTOMATIC CYCLE.
TOOL MUST BE LOADED ON THE ELECTRO-SPINDLE EXCLUSIVELY FROM THE CNC AND TOOLS
MOUNTED ON THE COMPARTMENT AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFIC CHAPTER.

9.44.2.5 Sanding tools


(=tamponi)

With "sanding tool" we mean: tools for surface finisching, utilizing on wood working machinery, generally composed
of abrasive material reported on plastic support fixed on a metal base.

ATTENTION: This particular type of tool has to be configured in the software of


the (Xilog Plus), as "L" type tool.
See table "parameter list" (L = Sanding tool, see manual of Xilog Plus)

It's forbidden to utilize sanding tools without having configured them as "L type tool" on the
set up table of Xilog Plus SCM Group S.p.A. refuses all responsibilities for damages
caused to persons or things due to the non-observance of the indications detailed on this
manual.

ATTENTION: The rollers or sanding brushless are tools particulars, for this reason it is
recommended:- DO NOT UTILIZE TOOLS IN WHICH THERE ISN'T MARKED ON THE
MAXIMUM SPEED OF ROTATION - DO NOT TRAPASSING THE ROTATION SPEED MARKED
ON THE TOOL - DO NOT UTILIZE THIS TYPE OF TOOL FOR WORKING DIFFERENT OF THE
ONES FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED

Maximum rotation for this tool is 1500 r.p.m.


La the machine has been configured in order do not accept rotation values more the 1500
r.p.m.

For the use and maintenance of the sanding units consult the indications supplied by the constructor.

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 16/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.3 Maintenance and lubrication


(~=r_6_iso30_3.20.3)

WARNING: All cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed by skilled personnel only.
Before you start any cleaning or maintenance operations, switch off and lock out the main
electrical and compressed air switches.

Do not attempt to perform repairs or other operations not described in this manual.

This machine must only be used and maintained by suitably qualified and authorised personnel.
All operations requiring dismantling of machine components must only be performed by suitably skilled and
authorised personnel.
When changing machine parts only use original spare parts. The manufacturer declines all responsibility for
damage caused by the use of non-original spare parts.
Accident prevention regulations, safety precautions and occupational health and safety recommendations must be
followed at all times.

CAUTION!: FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THIS MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAY EFFECT MACHINING
QUALITY AND CAN INCREASE THE RISK OF TOOL BREAKAGE.

NOTE: The maintenance intervals given above are intended as a guide only. With particularly dusty
operations (e.g. machining agglomerates) the maintenance operations must be performed more
frequently to ensure continued machine efficiency.

An efficient extractor system will ensure efficient operation and prevent damage caused by
overheating. Check the efficiency of the sawdust/shaving extractor system once a week.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 17/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.3ac)

Every 50 hours: lubricate the tool taper clamping unit with the grease spray provide (code: 0002400035C).

Unload the tool in the tools crib


Move the operator unit to an accessible position.
Insert the spray can tube in the gap between two of the collet sections (see the figure 21) and, holding the can in a
vertical position, spray.
repeat the operation for the other gaps.

cod. 0002400035C

50h
$-UM487

Fig. 21

In order to uniformly distribute the grease between the "collets", put the machine back in "MANUAL" mode and
perform 10-15 cone blocking and releasing actions (see fig. 22).

Fig. 22

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 18/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

Insert an empty cone and have the electric spindle rotate at 18000 rpm for about a minute (see fig. 23).

Fig. 23

At the end, stop the machine again, extract the tool cone and eliminate any grease deposited on the inside walls of
the electric spindle shaft with a cloth and, if necessary, with acetone (WARNING: ACETONE IS A FLAMMABLE
LIQUID!) (see fig. 24)
Also clean the hollow part of the tool cone (see fig. 25).

Fig. 24 Fig. 25

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 19/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN
Clean the cone outside and inside with a dry and clean cloth every week.

Every month clean the contact surfaces (shown in grey in the figure 26) between the tool tapers and the chuck
using acetone (CAUTION! FIRE HAZARD). Next, lubricate this area with the Teflub lubricant supplied (SCM:
0002400034A) Teflub is a dry, dustproof, waterproof lubricant which ensures correct clamping of the tool tapers.

NOTE: On tool holder tapers not supplied by manufacturer, perform this operation the first time the
tapers are used.

IMPORTANT: AS WELL AS OBSERVING THE WARNINGS ON THE CANISTER:


- DO NOT INHALE VAPOURS OR NEBULISED SUBSTANCES
- MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA USED IS WELL VENTILATED
- WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES IF CONTACT IS PROLONGED
- WEAR EYE PROTECTION

HSK63_05

Fig. 26

WARNING: If the machine remains switched off for a long period of time (more than one week), the
cone that stays mounted on the electro spindle must be carefully cleaned and lubricated.

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 20/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0

9.44.3.1 Heat exchanger


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.3.1)

Do not run the pump dry for longer than 30 seconds.


Check the coolant level in the two tanks on the optical level indicators (A).
When the coolant reaches the MIN level, top up through the fillers (B) until the level reaches the MAX mark.

Only use "REFIND" coolant liquid. (Order coolant from the Spare Parts Department, Order no.: 0736238634E). Do
not dilute with water. Use clean containers when topping up.

Warning: The coolant fluid is toxic.

At regular intervals, clean the cooling packs and the pump motor with a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 10
bar).

Fig. 27

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 21/22
AUTHOR 330
9.44 - HSK 63 connection 7,5-11Kw (10-15Hp) Electric spindle (TOP) - Rel. 2.0 EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 9.44 - Pag. 22/22 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

INDEX

9.61 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional)..................................3

9.61.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

9.61.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters ......................................................................................5

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 1/6
AUTHOR 330
9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 2/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

9.61 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional)


(frd_0-90_1.2_3.71...)

Subject operator unit is mounted on a boring head and is made up of a disk cutter A (fig. 1) mounted on a
support/slide B with pneumatic cylinder.
A rotation system with pneumetic actuator C and fixed beats makes it possible to automatically position the blade
in direction X or Y : this positioning is defined in the work program and managed by the CNC.

B
C

A
$-UM422d

Fig. 1

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Contact with tools at a standstill.


- Ejection of the workpiece or parts of it (e.g.: due to incorrect workpiece locking and/or machining
waste)
- Ejection of tools or parts of them due to: programming errors (e.g.: retrieval of incorrect tools),
tooling (association of incorrect parameters with a given tool code), incorrect tool mounting.
- Tool collisions with the worktable and/or reference stops due to programming errors.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 3/6
AUTHOR 330
9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN

9.61.1 Technical Characteristics


(frd_0-90_1.1_3.71.1.)

Rotation speed tool-holding shaft 3000rpm


Motor power 2,2kW (3Hp)
Max. cutter diameter* max 200mm
Automatically positioned by CNC
Available positions n°2 : in direction of axis X and Y
Positioning system pneumatic actuator

Maximum diameter of disc-type cutters

MAX 200mm

30 mm

$-UM14b

Fig. 2

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's instructions.
Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward speeds must be selected with great care
by the operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds
must never be exceeded.

SMB124
*If this group is assembled in position "1A", on 12 - 18 spindles heads, it is not possible to
assemble disk cutters with higher diameter than 180mm.

$-UM303c

MAX
180mm
1A 1-2

Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 4/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

9.61.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters


(frd_0-90_2.1_9.61.2_nosett)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 34-38 mm C-spanner
- 8mm Allen spanner

To fit the disk-type cutters, proceed as follows:

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D (Fig. 3) .


- Using the C spanner A undo the ring nut B
- Extract the fastening flanges C
- Fit the disc-type cutter in to fastening flanges C

WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D and tighten the ring nut fully home with the C-spanner A.

C
D R-D
C B
$-UM422c FD_0-90_PL-MX_02.eps

Fig. 3

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 5/6
AUTHOR 330
9.61 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 90° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 9.61 - Pag. 6/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

INDEX

9.62 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360 rotation (Optional) .................................3

9.62.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

9.62.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters ......................................................................................5

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 1/6
AUTHOR 330
9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 2/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

9.62 Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360 rotation (Optional)


(frd_0-360_1.0_3.72..)

Subject operator unit is mounted on a boring head and is made up of a disk cutter A (fig. 1) mounted on a
support/slide B with pneumatic cylinder.

A rotation system with gearedmotor C and encoder D makes it possible to automatically position the blade: this
positioning is defined in the work program and managed by the CNC.

B
C

A
$-UM422f

Fig. 1

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Ejection of all or part of the workpiece (splinters)


- Ejection of all or part of the tool
- Danger caused by programming errors that could cause the tools to crash against the fixed parts.
- Danger caused by programming errors that could mean that wrong tools are called.
- Danger caused by errors in programming machine equipment (e.g. associating the wrong
parameters to a certain tool code)
- Danger due to incorrect tool fitting
- Danger of tool locking screw or ring nut slackening.

Generic programming errors, including:


- always be sure that the tool rotation direction is correct!
- pay attention to the machining depth and the tool advance speed

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 3/6
AUTHOR 330
9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN

9.62.1 Technical Characteristics


(frd_0-360_1.1_3.72.1)

Rotation speed tool-holding shaft 3000rpm


Motor power 2,2kW (3Hp)
Max. cutter diameter* max 200mm
Automatically positioned by CNC
Available positions n°2 : in direction of axis X and Y
Positioning system gearedmotor - encoder

Maximum diameter of disc-type cutters

MAX 200mm

30 mm

$-UM14b

Fig. 2

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's instructions.
Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward speeds must be selected with great care
by the operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds
must never be exceeded.

SMB124
*If this group is assembled in position "1A", on 12 - 18 spindles heads, it is not possible to
assemble disk cutters with higher diameter than 170mm.

$-UM303b

MAX
170mm
1A 1-2

Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 4/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1

9.62.2 Fitting Disk-type Cutters


(frd_0-90_2.1_9.61.2_nosett)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 34-38 mm C-spanner
- 8mm Allen spanner

To fit the disk-type cutters, proceed as follows:

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D (Fig. 3) .


- Using the C spanner A undo the ring nut B
- Extract the fastening flanges C
- Fit the disc-type cutter in to fastening flanges C

WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D and tighten the ring nut fully home with the C-spanner A.

C
D R-D
C B
$-UM422c FD_0-90_PL-MX_02.eps

Fig. 3

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 5/6
AUTHOR 330
9.62 - Cutter disk unit with automatic 0° - 360° rotation (Optional) - Rel. 2.1 EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 9.62 - Pag. 6/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3

INDEX

9.63 Horizontal router unit (Optional)...........................................................................................2

9.63.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................3

9.63.2 Mounting Horizontal Router.................................................................................4

9.63.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters ......................................................................................5

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 1/6
AUTHOR 330
9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3 EN
9.63 Horizontal router unit (Optional)
(fro_1.0_9.63)

This operator unit is mounted on a boring head; it has an


horizontal spindle, where an horizontal cylindrical router or saw-
blade can be mounted.
There is also a version with double outlets where two vertical
cylindrical routers can be mounted. A
D
The main components are:
- an alternating current motor A (Fig.1) for high-frequency
working
- a gear device E for the horizontal electrospindle
G
C
- a mobile support F mounted on guides and recirculating ball
screw slides with moving system means pneumatic cylinder
- a static frequency converter (Inverter) B for the steplessy-
variable rotating speed (if present, Inverter's electrospindle is
usually used) F
A version with group positioning from 0° to 360°is also optionally
available (Vector).
A rotation system with gearedmotor C and encoder D makes it
possible to automatically position the blade: this positioning is
defined in the work program and managed by the CNC.
E
SMB124
INSTRUCTIONS: DON'T ROTATE THE GROUP BY
HANDS: THE SETTING OF THE VECTOR CAN BE
LOST.
FRO_001a

Fig. 1

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Ejection of all or part of the workpiece (splinters)


- Ejection of all or part of the tool
- Danger caused by programming errors that could
cause the tools to crash against the fixed parts. B
- Danger caused by programming errors that could
mean that wrong tools are called. GVX2000
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx xxxx
- Danger caused by errors in programming machine xxxxxxxxx x
xxxxxxxxx xxx
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx
equipment (e.g. associating the wrong parameters to xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx xxxx
xxxxxx xxxxx

a certain tool code) xxxxxxxxx


xxxxxxxxx

- Danger due to incorrect tool fitting


- Danger of tool locking screw or ring nut Bonfiglioli
Group Silectron

slackening.
Sistemi

$-UM483a

Fig. 1a
Generic programming errors, including:
- always be sure that the tool rotation direction is
correct!
- pay attention to the machining depth and the tool advance speed

Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 2/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3

9.63.1 Technical Characteristics


(fro_2.2_3.73.1)

Motor power 3kW (3Hp)


Polarity n°4
Spindle rotation speed 6000÷14000rpm
Rotation speed control from CNC via an inverter
Rotation right
Cooling system with fan
Maximum tool sizes see table and fig. 2

SMB064

A
SMB080
0∞-360∞ B
A Ø MAX 250mm
B Ø MAX 120mm
50 mm MAX
10mm

MAX 80mm MAX 105mm

Ø MAX Ø MAX
12mm 20mm

$-UM329d

Fig. 2

CAUTION: only use tools that conform to standards "EN 847-1:2005 and EN 847-2:2000/AC2003
(European Standards)" and follow all the manufacturer's instructions.
Spindle rotation speeds, machining depths and forward speeds must be selected with great care
by the operator on the basis of tool specifications and type of material and maximum tool speeds
must never be exceeded.

SMB124
If this unit is installed in "1A" position , (on heads at 12 - 18 spindles ) or in position "1", (on heads
at 30 spindles), it is not possible to install saw units.

SMB124
On the Author series 300 it is not possible to install saw units.

$-UM304b

$-UM303a

1A 1-2 1 2 3

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 3/6
AUTHOR 330
9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3 EN

9.63.2 Mounting Horizontal Router


(fro_2.3_9.63.2)

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment stopping the
machine (press the black button "0" on the control
panel). R-D
- All the operations described in this section must
be performed by the machine operator.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its


measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual. M1

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 68-75mm C-spanner M
- C-spanner with cylindrical dog: 40 - 42 mm B R-D
C
A
WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check
that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

To fit tools with cylindrical connections to the horizontal milling A1 M1


spindle proceed as follows:
- Undo the ring nut A (Fig. 4) completely.
- Select a gripper B with a bore diameter suitable for the tool
fitting shank.
- Press gripper B into ring nut A.
M2
- Screw ring nut A on but without tightening.
- Insert the tool C into the gripper.
C1 B1
- Block the spindle using C-spanner M and screw in fully the
ferrule with C-spanner M1
FRO_003a

Fig. 4a
N.B.: If the unit has a double horizontal spindle, to fit
the tool on the rear spindle proceed as follows:

- Undo the ring nut A1 (Fig. 4) completely.


- Select a gripper B1 with a bore diameter suitable for the tool fitting shank.
- Press gripper B1 into ring nut A1.
- Screw ring nut A1 on but without tightening.
- Insert the tool C1 into the gripper.
- Block the spindle using the open-ended spanner M2 and screw in fully the ferrule with C-spanner M3

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 4/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3

9.63.3 Fitting Disk-type Cutters


(fro_2.3_9.63.3)

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 68-75mm C-spanner
- 10mm Allen spanner

To fit the disk-type cutters, proceed as follows:

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D (Fig. 3) .


- Using the C spanner A undo the ring nut B
- Extract the fastening flanges C
- Fit the disc-type cutter in to fastening flanges C

WARNING: When fitting a disk-type cutter, check that the spindle rotation direction is correct.

- Hold the spindle still with the Allen spanner D and tighten the ring nut fully home with the C-spanner A.

C
B D R-D
FRO_002
FD_0-90_PL-MX_02.eps

Fig. 3 Fig. 3a

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

WARNING:
- During the machine adjustment and equipping phase, ensure that the machine is on emergency
status (press the red mushroom-top button on the control panel).
- All the operations described in this section must be performed by the machine operator.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 5/6
AUTHOR 330
9.63 - Horizontal router unit (Optional) - Rel. 2.3 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 9.63 - Pag. 6/6 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

INDEX

10.11 Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR TOP (Optional).........................................2

10.11.1 Technical Characteristics ....................................................................................4

10.11.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting ........................6

10.11.2.1 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for bored tools ................7

10.11.3 Manual movements .............................................................................................8

10.11.4 Loading tools on the magazine..........................................................................10

10.11.5 Maintenance and lubrication..............................................................................14

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 1/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN
10.11 Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR TOP (Optional)
(r12_a330_1.0_10.11)

Subject deposit is mounted on the electrospindle support and is composed of:


- a wheel A (fig. 1) with a tool holder with 12 grips B
- a movement device in Y that utilize pneumatic cylinder C and a block guide D with ball recirculating sliding blocks

WARNING: The deposit can only be accessed while the machine is in safety mode:
- switch the machine to emergency stop condition.

to rotate the tool crib it's necessary:


- Press S2 key and F6 key simultaneously on the mobile keyboard in order to start the rotation

NOTE: releasing push-button S2 during magazine rotation generates the immediate stop of
magazine rotation

When on the machine is installed also the "Tool -room" at 12 positions, there are two functioning
possibilities:

1) RANDOM:
With this mode the interface operator randomly handles the tools on the grips of the Tool Room and Rapid deposit.
At each tool change cycle, the interface operator verifies the position of the tools to be loaded and searches for the
position of the tools to be unloaded by using an anti-collision algorythm based on the measurement parameters of
the tool.

2) FIXED POSITION:
With this mode the tools are always loaded and unloaded from the start position.

NOTE: The two modes are compatible, in other words it is possible to work in "random" mode and
then select "fixed position" mode without having to reprogram all the tools in the magazines.
Before changing the operating mode, unload the tool from all of the electrospindles.

D
B

A
R12_330_01

Fig. 1

WARNING - RESIDUAL RISKS:

- Danger caused by programming errors that could mean that wrong tools are called.

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 2/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

- Danger caused by errors in programming machine equipment (e.g. associating the wrong
parameters to a certain tool code)
- Danger due to incorrect tool fitting
- Erroneus tool is loaded into the tool-holder store.
- Danger of tool locking screw or ring nut slackening.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 3/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

10.11.1 Technical Characteristics


(r12_a430-top_1.0_10.10.1)

WARNING: THIS CHAPTER INDICATES THE SIZE OF THE TOOLS THAT CAN BE MOUNTED ON
THE DEPOSIT: THE SIZE, WEIGHT AND SPEED OF THE TOOLS THAT CAN ACTUALLY BE
SUPPORTED BY THE ELECTRO-SPINDLE DURING OPERATION ARE INDICATED IN THE SPECIFIC
CHAPTER FOR EACH TYPE OF ELECTRO-SPINDLE.

MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS OF TOOLS THAT CAN BE INSTALLED IN THIS MAGAZINE ARE:

MAX 190mm

MAX 190mm
MAX MAX
Ø120mm Ø160mm
HSK63_20d HSK63_32

Fig. 2 Fig. 2a

A
Ø120mm Ø8
0m
m
Ø1

0mm
00

Ø8
mm
mm

Ø100mm
00
Ø1
Ø100mm

m
0m
0
Ø1
Ø1
0

m
0m

0m
Ø8
m

Ø8
mm 0m Ø160mm
0 m
Ø10
R12_A430_top_02a

Fig. 3

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 4/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

MAXIMUM SIZE OF THE ANGULAR COUNTER HEADS:

Ø MAX
A 150mm
MAX 60mm
MAX
40mm
Ø MAX
16mm
Ø MAX
12 mm

OK
OK
R12_A430_TOP_02

Fig. 4

WARNING: THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT SUPPORTED BY THE TOOL MAGAZINE IS: 25 kg

THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT SUPPORTED BY THE TOOL-HOLDING TONGS "A" (Fig. 14a) IS: 5 Kg

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 5/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

10.11.2 Fitting Cutting Tools on Toolholder Spindles with HSK 63 fitting


(tr_12_hsk63_3.42.2)

WARNING:
Fitting and removal of routers from toolholder spindles must not be performed on the machine.
The toolholder spindle must be removed from the operating unit and the cutting tools fitted or
removed at the workbench.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- 45-50mm C-spanner
- 36mm open-ended spanner or clamp M (Fig. 6)

To fit tools with cylindrical fitting on the tool holder spindles, proceed as follows:
- Undo the ring nut A (Fig. 5) completely
- Select a gripper B with a bore diameter suitable for the tool fitting shank (Check the diameter marked on the
collet. The collet diameter must be the same or slightly less than the diameter of the tool shank, e.g. tool shank 20,
collet 19-20)
- Press gripper B into ring nut A
- Screw ring nut A on but without tightening
- Insert the tool C into the gripper.
- Hold the tool holder spindle still with the open-ended spanner or with the clamp M and tighten the ring nut fully
home with the C spanner
- Fit the tool holder spindle onto the electrospindle

CAUTION: Check that grub screw D is always fitted in the tool-holder spindle: if it is not fitted dust
can get into the electro-spindle and cause malfunctions and damage.

D
SK
H

B
$-CCR85

A
$-CR86

D
C
M
$-UM297a $-UM298

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

Check that the tool direction of rotation/machining is compatible with the locking system (ring nuts
or screws); a tool which rotates to the right requires a ring nut or screw with right-hand thread.

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 6/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

10.11.2.1 Tools fitting on Toolholder Spindle with Ø30mm shaft for


bored tools
(em_tr12_al7467_9.47s.2.3)

WARNING:
Fitting and removal of routers from toolholder spindles must not be performed on the machine.
The toolholder spindle must be removed from the operating unit and the cutting tools fitted or
removed at the workbench.

WARNINGS: Each time you change a tool, take its measurements and enter them in the tooling
parameters: see Xilog programming manual.

To fit the tools, you need the following:


- spanner E
- clamp M

Put in the toolholder spindle shaft the spacers A and the tool (or the series of tools) B till the "tools pack" is created,
then block with the flange C - C1 through the screws D.

ATTENTION: VERIFY THAT THE FLANGE "C" CLAMPS CORRECTLY THE TOOLS PACK: IN
PARTICULAR IT DOESN'T HAVE TO LAY ON THE SHAFT INFERIOR FACE OR IT DOESN'T HAVE
TO REMAIN OUT OF THE SHAFT.

A = distanziale / spacer
B = utensile / tool

B A M

A
E

D C C1

A OK
B
1 ÷ 2 mm

A NO NO
1 ÷ 2 mm

NO NO
$-UM539

Fig. 5

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 7/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

10.11.3 Manual movements


(r12_a430-top_1.0_10.10.4)

To activate the "MDI" Mode.

The icons activate the following functions (see fig. 8):


Icon n° 1 = movement to basic position (stroke 40mm)
Icon n° 2 = movement to high position (stroke 40mm)
Icon n° 3 = movement to rear position (Y+)
Icon n° 4 = movement to front position (Y-)

To carry out the movements it is necessary to:


- position yourself over the icon and press enter (the frame of the icon will turn green)
- press the start (startcycle) key of the mobile push-button panel to carry out the selected function

NOTE: should an operation be requested that is incorrect or not possible, it will not be carried out:
the LED in the start button will light up and inhibit manual movement.
To reset the system, it's necessary to exit of the screen page opening another window, or it's
necessary to press in sequence the stop cycle [stop cycle] button on the mobile keyboard and
press the key F10 function on the keyboard.

Fig. 7a

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 8/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

Fig. 8

To carry out the movements it is necessary to:


- from the basic menu press key "F6" to activate the "MDI" state
- go to the "ISO" field
- enter the code "Mxxx" to execute the relative command:
- to confirm the code press ENTER
invio

- Press the "start cycle" button on the mobile push-button panel to execute the command

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 9/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

10.11.4 Loading tools on the magazine


(tr12top_1.0_10.6.4)

FOREWARD:
Before starting to work, the tools mounted in the deposit slots must be loaded into the deposit and the information
stored in the CNC.
It is understood that in the CNC the tools must be stored by number and tool information (see the programming
manual provided with the machine)

-
(r12_a430-top_1.0_10.10.4a)

WARNING: Extreme care must be used when manually operating the tools: the machine is
equipped with a device that detects the presence of a tool-holder on the electro spindle. BUT IT
DOES NOT RECOGNIZE THE TYPE OF TOOL ACTUALLY MOUNTED.
The errors listed below can generate extremely dangerous situations:
- tool inserted in wrong room position
- tool inserted in right room position but is not consistent with the tool recalled in the work
program.
- tool inserted in tool-holder with rotating direction that does not comply.
- using tools that do not comply with regulations EN847-1:1997 and EN847-2:2001
- using damaged tools: following a collision or such it is mandatory that the tools be overhauled by
having them resharpened and balanced.
- using tools at a speed greater than that indicated by the manufacturer.
- using tools that are larger in size than those shown in this manual.

THE ABOVE MENTIONED ERRORS MAY GENERATE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEMS:

- Rotating the tool at a speed greater than the limit established by the manufacturer may cause off-
balancing, breaks and high speed ejection, with the risk of shooting through the protections installed on
the machine and fatal effects on anyone that is hit.
- Collision between the tool and parts of the machine may result in breaks in the tool and the machine, and
serious consequences, as indicated in the previous point, or lesser ones up to a simple crack on machine
parts.

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 10/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

To load tools into the deposit it is necessary to proceed as follows:


- switch the machine to emergency stop condition.

- activate MDI mode on the CNC


- Pressing S2 key and F6 key simultaneously on the mobile keyboard in order to start the rotation

NOTE: releasing push-button S2 during magazine rotation generates a machine emergency


condition

N.B.: insert the correct tools in the magazine places numbered as shown in fig. 3
The manufacturer suggests that, in order to prevent errors, an identification tag must be placed on
all tools showing reference "A" (figure 9).
The tools arranged in the deposits must correspond perfectly to the numbers displayed on the
screen that appears when the menu in fig. 9 is activated.

- enter the connection between the tool and its location in the magazine in magazine management:
- in "MDI" mode press key shift +F11: the screen page in fig.9 appears

The table represents, in a circular manner, the fields relative to the magazine locations on the machine: in
particular (Fig. 9a), on the right there is a typical Tool-Room magazine, and on the left a typical Rapid magazine.

Deleting tools:
- use function key then (to confirm) to delete all tools in both magazines.

Loading tools:
- select fields
- use the "arrow" keys on the keyboard to view the tools present amongst the equipment loaded; to confirm press
key .

The lower left hand corner (Ref. A - Fig. 9 / 9a) displays the electrospindle enabled and the tool if loaded.

To delete the tools present on the electrospindles, you must run an unloading cycle first.

To write/change the characteristics of tools, the standard "tool editor" procedure (see the Xilog "Programming and
Operations Manual") must be used, with the only difference that the fields relative to positioning into deposit space
are deactivated (Ref B-C fig.10).

NOTE for Xilog Plus: after modifying the features of the tools in the Xilog Plus program (Editor), to
make them immediately active in the Panel Mac program, exit the "MDI" environment (by selecting
another: e.g.: manual) and reactivate the "MDI" environment.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 11/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

Fig. 9

Fig. 9a

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 12/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

Fig. 10

During a cycle in "Automatic" mode, you have a dynamic view of the tool locations in the magazines and on the
electrospindles.
Activate the display of the magazine locations from the "Automatic programs" menu using key combination
Alt+F11.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 13/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN

10.11.5 Maintenance and lubrication


(tr_12_hsk63_3.42.5)

WARNING: All cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed by skilled personnel only.
Before you start any cleaning or maintenance operations, switch off and lock out the main
electrical and compressed air switches.

Do not attempt to perform repairs or other operations not described in this manual.

This machine must only be used and maintained by suitably qualified and authorised personnel.
All operations requiring dismantling of machine components must only be performed by suitably skilled and
authorised personnel.
When changing machine parts only use original spare parts. The manufacturer declines all responsibility for
damage caused by the use of non-original spare parts.
Accident prevention regulations, safety precautions and occupational health and safety recommendations must be
followed at all times.

CAUTION!: FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THIS MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAY EFFECT MACHINING
QUALITY AND CAN INCREASE THE RISK OF TOOL BREAKAGE.

NOTE: The maintenance intervals given above are intended as a guide only. With particularly dusty
operations (e.g. machining agglomerates) the maintenance operations must be performed more
frequently to ensure continued machine efficiency.

-
(r12_a330_1.0_10.11.5a)

Every 40 - 50 hours (weekly maintenance):


Lubricate recirculating ball shoes:

F
NOTE: the machining of medium density material
creates very fine sawdust and shavings; in these cases
the lubrication intervals specified must be halved.

- Inject approximately 2-3cm3 of grease (aprox. 3-4 pumping - Type


"AGIP - GR MU EP0") into each grease nipple F . Clean away any
excess grease.

R12_330_01a

-
(tab_grassi_1)

GREASE FOR BEARINGS, SCREWS


AND RECIRCULATING BALL SHOES
(Type "B")
AGIP GR MU EP0
KLUBER MICROLUBE GL261

-
(tr_12_hsk63_3.42.5b)

Clean the cone outside and inside with a dry and clean cloth every week.

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 14/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0

Every month clean the contact surfaces (shown in grey in the figure 12) between the tool tapers and the chuck
using acetone (CAUTION! FIRE HAZARD). Next, lubricate this area with the Teflub lubricant supplied (SCM:
0002400034A) Teflub is a dry, dustproof, waterproof lubricant which ensures correct clamping of the tool tapers.

NOTE: On tool holder tapers not supplied by manufacturer, perform this operation the first time the
tapers are used.

HSK63_05

Fig. 12

WARNING: If the machine remains switched off for a long period of time (more than one week), the
cone that stays mounted on the electro spindle must be carefully cleaned and lubricated.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 15/16
AUTHOR 330
10.11 - Magazine type RAPID 12 - AUTHOR 300 - (Optional) - Rel. 1.0 EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 10.11 - Pag. 16/16 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

INDEX

20.1 Warnings .............................................................................................................2

20.2 Cleaning ..............................................................................................................5

20.3 Periodic Checks and Maintenance ......................................................................5

. Filter unit..............................................................................................................6

. Vacuum pump precleaner ...................................................................................7

. Cleaning the electrical cabinet air filters ..............................................................8

. VACUUM PUMP MAINTENANCE.......................................................................9

20.3.1 Empty the compressed air tanks .......................................................................10

20.3.2 Check of pressure regulator units......................................................................11

20.4 Periodic Lubrication ...........................................................................................12

. VACUUM PUMP LUBRICATION.......................................................................18

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance..................................................19

20.4.1 Centralised Lubrication Unit (OPTIONAL).........................................................22

20.5 Table of greases and oils ..................................................................................24

20.6 Maintenance table .............................................................................................25

20.6.1 Programmed maintenance card ........................................................................26

20.7 Inconvenients, causes and solutions (showing by NCC)...................................28

20.8 Dismantling........................................................................................................55

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 1/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
20.1 Warnings
(u2412_1.0_ce_ftc_20.1)

SMB124
Don't make any repairings and/or interventions not foreseen in this handbook.

Only fully trained and authorised personnel can use the machine and carry out maintenance
operations.
All the operations requiring the disassembly of parts have to be committed to the technical staff
authorised by the constructor
Use only spare parts exclusively original in case of changing of some of the machine parts
Follow the safety and hygienic rules on work during the maintenance phases.
The constructor doesn't take any responsibilities for damages coming from the use of non original
spare parts.

WARNING: During maintenance, cleaning and lubrication operations, make sure that the power
supply and compressed air are switched off and cannot be accidentally switched on.
To switch off the power supply, turn main switch A (fig. 20.1a) to the zero (0) position and lock it
with a padlock
To switch off the compressed air supply, turn the knob L (fig. 20.1b) and padlock it.

ATTENTION: When the machine is pneumatically isolated the air in the system is not unloaded:
possible control or maintenance operations have to be executed by skilled technicians as the
tubes disconnection could generate unexpected movements on the machine.

IO
N L
O OFF

O
OFF
$-UM175a
$-UM534a

Fig. 20.1a Fig. 20.1b

CAUTION:
The keys for padlocks for the main electricity On/Off switch and the filter unit compressed air quick
discharge valves, and the tool for opening the electrical cabinet doors must be supplied to
authorised personnel.
All the operations have to be executed by the operator in charge of maintenance or by technical
and qualified personnel.

Chap. 20 - Pag. 2/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

INTRODUCTION: It is essential that deadlines be met and maintenance operations carried out in
order for the machine to function properly in time. Proper function involves both the productive
part of the machine and the part connected with safety.

The intervals between maintenance operations are approximate and may vary according to the
working environment of the machine and the type of material being machined:

NOTA: N.B.: Recommended maintenance intervals are calculated according to use of the machine
for approx. 8 hours per day. If the machine is used more than this for example, several shifts each
day) maintenance operations must be carried out more often.

IMPORTANT: The machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings;
in these cases the maintenance and lubrication operations must be performed more frequently

To inject grease, use the grease gun P provided (Fig. 20.1c); each pump of the gun corresponds to 0.7 cm3 of
grease.

P
ACS-28a

Fig. 20.1c

Numeric Control battery expiry date: bear in mind that the numeric control is fitted with a buffer
battery whose average duration is greater than 5 years. We recommend replacing it at the expiry of
the fifth year of machine use.

Generally, the first sign of battery decline is the repeated loss of the buffered data, such as
"number of tool inserted in electro-spindle". It is better not to wait for this event and act
beforehand; otherwise you could loose all the Numeric Control data.

For further explanations please consult the Support Service.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 3/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
.
(sp)

Chap. 20 - Pag. 4/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

20.2 Cleaning
(a632_ceb1.0-20.2)

WARNING: During maintenance, cleaning and lubrication operations, make sure that the power
supply and compressed air are switched off and cannot be accidentally switched on (See Sec.
20.1).

For correct cleaning of the machine, follow the instructions below:

- Remove sawdust and shavings with a vacuum cleaner. Do not use compressed air. Compressed air will only
blow dirt into delicate machine parts leading to operating faults.
- Keep the axis guides and screw drives clean at all times.
- Keep the work surfaces and suction heads clean at all times.
- Keep the working zone around the machine clean.

20.3 Periodic Checks and Maintenance


(a632_ceb1.0-20.3)

WARNING: During maintenance, cleaning and lubrication operations, make sure that the power
supply and compressed air are switched off and cannot be accidentally switched on (See Sec.
20.1).

PRECAUTIONS:
All the operations have to be executed by the operator in charge of maintenance or by technical
and qualified personnel.
The intervals between maintenance operations are approximate and may vary according to the
working environment of the machine and the type of material being machined:
The machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings; in these cases
the maintenance and lubrication operations must be performed more frequently.

NOTA: N.B.: Recommended maintenance intervals are calculated according to use of the machine
for approx. 8 hours per day. If the machine is used more than this for example, several shifts each
day) maintenance operations must be carried out more often.

PRECAUTION: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO REGULARLY CHECK THAT SAFETY DEVICES


ARE WORKING PROPERLY ESPECIALLY IF THEY ARE NOT OFTEN ACTIVATED (SEE CHAP. 2.1).

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 5/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

. Filter unit
(pl_mx_1.0_20.3a)

AT FREQUENT INTERVALS (daily maintenance):

Filter unit:

Check the water (condensation) level in the tank A: it must not go above the level marked.
If the water level goes above the level marked, immediately check operation of the float inside which activates
automatic discharge from the connector B:
- shut off the air supply by turning and lifting the knob C
- remove the tank A
- using a screwdriver release the float by pushing it down (this opens the bleeder valve)
- run a test, filling the tank with water to check if the float is operating: if it is, refit the tank, if it isn't, fit a new
tank.

C
E D

B A
45˚
$-UM525c

Fig. 20.3a

Every 180 hours:


Filter clean:

- move the machining units to the parking position


- shut off the air supply by turning and lifting the knob C
- remove the tank A
- unscrew the filter unit E
- clean with compressed air blown from the inside of the filter F
- reassemble the parts

When the machine stops due to a drop in the pressure of the compressed air supplied, first check
the entire supply system. If the system supplies enough air, change the filter F.

Chap. 20 - Pag. 6/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

. Vacuum pump precleaner


(a632_ceb1.0-20.3b)

PERIODICALLY (weekly maintenance):

Every 50 hours:
Vacuum pump precleaner:

- Switch off the pump


- Undo the spring clips A (fig. 20.3b) and remove cover B.
- Take out the cartridge and clean it by blowing compressed through it from the inside.
- Refit the cartridge and the cover B and check that the sealing ring in the cover is correctly positioned.

A B
$-UM229a

Fig. 20.3b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 7/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

. Cleaning the electrical cabinet air filters


(a632_ceb1.0-20.3c)

PERIODICALLY (weekly maintenance):

Every 50 hours:
Cleaning the electrical cabinet air filters:

WARNING: During cleaning operations, make sure that the power supply is switched off: turn main
switch to the zero (0) position and lock it with a padlock (see fig. 20.1a).

To clean filters it is necessary to proceed as follows:


- Remove the cover A (fig. 20.3c) levering with a screwdriver in the fissure B
- Take out the filters C and clean it with air compressed

NOTE: in case the filter is particulary dirty, it is necessary to replace it with one of similar filtering
capacity.

Fig. 20.3c

Chap. 20 - Pag. 8/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

. VACUUM PUMP MAINTENANCE


(a632_ceb1.0-20.3d)

The pump maintenance schedules are shown below: the relative instructions are included in the
documentation supplied with the machine.

NOTE: If the filters are oily or greasy, they must be replaced.

WARNING: FAILURE TO OBSERVE PUMP MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS


MAY RESULT IN THE PUMP OVERHEATING AND BEING DAMAGED.

Maintenance for vacuum pump


Clean the Replace the 1° Check Check the vanes
filters filters the vanes (after the first)
Brand / Model
Rietschle / VLT 40 400/500 1500/2000
5000 hours 1000 hours
hours hours
Rietschle / VTA 400/500 1500/2000
6000 hours 2000 hours
100 hours hours
Rietschle / VTB 400/500 1500/2000
2000 hours 500 hours
250 hours hours

Becker / VT 4.40 400/500 1500/2000


3000 hours or at least once a year
hours hours
Becker / KVT 400/500 1500/2000
3000 hours or at least once a year
3.100 hours hours
Becker / VTLF 400/500 1500/2000
3000 hours or at least once a year
250 hours hours

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 9/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.3.1 Empty the compressed air tanks


(a632_ceb1.0-20.3.1)

Every 180 hours:


Empty the compressed air tanks:

Place a container under the discharge tube A (fig. 20.3.1a) to collect the liquids which gather inside the tank B.
Slowly open valve C to let out the liquid which has gathered.
Close the valves.

Fig. 20.3.1a

Chap. 20 - Pag. 10/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

20.3.2 Check of pressure regulator units


(a430_ce_bps_4.0-20.3.2)

Every 180 hours:


Check of pressure regulator units:

Filter unit
(Fig. 20.3.2a): - To adjust the compressed air pressure, lift and rotate the knob A to obtain the
setting required. Read off the air pressure on the pressure gauge A1. The
recommended working pressure for this machine is 6 bar.
- Press down the knob A to lock it in position.

Pressure multiplier
(pic. 20.3.2b): - lift and rotate the knob B in order to adjust the exercise pressure of 9 bar, by
checking the worth on the manometer B1.
- Push the knob B in order to block it again.

Heads balancing
(pic. 20.3.2c): - check on the manometer C if the pressure is included between 5 and 6 bar
[equip]-address an after sales department in case of adjustment: the pressure
changes as far as the configuration of the operating groups is concerned

A1

$-UM525b

Fig. 20.3.2a Fig. 20.3.2b

Fig. 20.3.2c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 11/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.4 Periodic Lubrication


(a632_ceb1.0-20.4)

WARNING: During maintenance, cleaning and lubrication operations, make sure that the power
supply and compressed air are switched off and cannot be accidentally switched on (See Sec.
20.1).

PRECAUTIONS:

All the operations have to be executed by the operator in charge of maintenance or by technical
and qualified personnel.
The intervals between maintenance operations are approximate and may vary according to the
working environment of the machine and the type of material being machined:

N.B.: Recommended maintenance intervals are calculated according to use of the machine for
approx. 8 hours per day. If the machine is used more than this (for example, several shifts each
day) maintenance operations must be carried out more often.

IMPORTANT: The machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings;
in these cases the maintenance and lubrication operations must be performed more frequently

To inject grease, use the grease gun P provided; each pump of the gun corresponds to 0.7 cm3 of grease.

P
ACS-28a

Fig. 20.1c

Chap. 20 - Pag. 12/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

-
(a632_ceb1.0-20.4a)

Every 8 hours (daily maintenance):


Lubricating the recirculating ball screws and sliding blocks:

NOTE: this intervention doesn't have to be regarded when the centralised lubrication device
described in ch. 20.4.2 is installed.

NOTE: the machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings; in these
cases the lubrication intervals specified must be halved.

- Inject approximately 1cm3 of grease (Type "AGIP GR MU EP0" - See table in Sec. 20.5) into each grease nipple
F (Fig. 20.4a / 20.4b). Clean away any excess grease.

Fig. 20.4a Fig. 20.4b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 13/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
-
(a632_ceb1.0-20.4b)

Every 16 / 24 hours:
Lubricating the recirculating ball screws (X axis):

NOTE: the machining of medium density material creates very fine sawdust and shavings; in these
cases the lubrication intervals specified must be halved.

- Inject grease type "AGIP GR MU EP0" in the grease nipple A untill it comes out from points B ; clean the excess
grease that came out.

Fig. 11.4c Fig. 11.4d

Chap. 20 - Pag. 14/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

-
(a632_ceb1.0-20.4e)

boring head spindle lubrication

Every 150/200 hours (at least once a month)

- from the CNC select and lower all the vertical spindles (MDI function: see Xilog / Manual Data Input manual) and
clean them with organic or alkaline detergents
- dry the surface of the spindles well
- spray a moderate amount of "Fin Lube TF" type lubricant (aerosol) (code 0002402070H) evenly over the entire
surface of the spindle
- let it dry for approximately 1 minute before retracting the spindles

IMPORTANT: AS WELL AS OBSERVING THE WARNINGS ON THE CANISTER:


- DO NOT INHALE VAPOURS OR NEBULISED SUBSTANCES
- MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA USED IS WELL VENTILATED
- WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES IF CONTACT IS PROLONGED
- WEAR EYE PROTECTION

N.B.: When the spindles shows delays or the ascent/descent slows down, immediately proceed
with cleaning and lubricating.

$-UM436
Fig. 11.4i

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 15/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
-
(a744_2.0_ce_bps_20.4b)

Every 800-1000 hours (six-monthly maintenance):


Lubricate the 10/12/18 spindles on the main head:

For a correct lubrication operate as follows:

- To mount on a spindle, possibly next to the motorization, a sufficiently long screw M10 to be able to apply then an
electric screwdriver or a pneumatic drill
- Apply a pneumatic screw driver or pneumatic drill (at charge of the customer) on the A screw to make the spindle
turn (we suggest a rotation of 200÷500 rpm)

- Inject approximately 10cm3 of grease (aprox. 14 pumping - Type KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU15) into each grease
nipple T (Fig. 20.4l).
- With the pneumatic screw driver, previously mounted, make the Head spindles turn for at least 2 min. to obtain a
correct distribution of the grease.

IMPORTANT: Failure to perform this operation, making the head revolve only when the motor is
started, means that the grease would "shoot off" and the gears would not be lubricated.

Boring head with 10 vertical spindles: The above-mentioned operations must be carried out 3 times
in order to insert 30cm3 of grease in the head.

Boring head with 12/18 vertical spindles: The above-mentioned operations must be carried out 4/5
times in order to insert 40/50cm3 of grease in the head.

The best lubrication results could be obtained making the spindles turn with the drill while
pumping the grease in the lubricator.

T
A

Q
TFV_Auth_18m_01

Fig. 20.4l

Every 800-1000 hours (six-monthly maintenance):


Lubricate the horizontal heads:
- Inject approximately 1cm3 of grease (aprox. 2 pumping - Type "KLÜBER - ISOFLEX NBU 15") into grease nipple
Q.

-
(t12m+fd_a-top1.0_8.9.3a)

Chap. 20 - Pag. 16/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

Every 1000 hours:


Cutter disk unit lubrication:

- Inject approximately 5cm3 of grease (aprox. 7 pumping - Type "KLÜBER - ISOFLEX NBU 15") into grease nipple
A.

A
FD_A430-TOP_01b

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 17/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

. VACUUM PUMP LUBRICATION


(a632_ceb1.0-20.4g)

The pump lubrication schedules are shown below: the relative instructions are included in the
documentation supplied with the machine.

WARNING: FAILURE TO OBSERVE PUMP MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS


MAY RESULT IN THE PUMP OVERHEATING AND BEING DAMAGED.

Vacuum pump lubrication schedule


Periodic lubrication (after the
1st lubrication
first)
Brand / Model
Rietschle / VLT 40 Lubricated for working life
Rietschle / VTA 100 10000 hours or at least once a year
Rietschle / VTB 250 4500 hours or at least once a year

Becker / VT 4.40 Lubricated for working life


Becker / KVT 3.100 Lubricated for working life
Becker / VTLF 250 3000 hours or at least once a year

Chap. 20 - Pag. 18/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

. Electrospindle and HSK63 taper maintenance


(r_10_hsk63_3.30.3ad_1.1_inp)

Every 50 hours: lubricate the tool taper clamping unit with the grease spray provide (code: 0002400035C).

Unload the tool in the tools crib


Move the operator unit to an accessible position.
Insert the spray can tube in the gap between two of the collet sections (see the figure 21) and, holding the can in a
vertical position, spray.
repeat the operation for the other gaps.

cod. 0002400035C

50h
$-UM487

Fig. 21

For a correct distribution of the grease between the pedals of the clamps it is necessary to activate the locking
/unlocking cone tool-holder function into the emergency condition. Execute this procedure:
- Machine state operating
- Selection MDI ISO page
- Selection the electrospindle by the codes M activating it with "Enter" and "Start cycle" [startcycle] (M31 =
invio

electrospindle n.1, M32 = electrospindle n.2, etc.)


- Activate the emergency of the machine: the key 27 is operating (led lightening)
- Execute the locking/unlocking cycles by the button 27 (almost 10/15 cycles)

At the reset from emergency of the machine the button 27 are disabilited

Push-button for the blocking/relase of The switched on pilot light


27 the cone ISO30 / HSK63: active in shows that the button is
CMD_27
"Automatic" and "MDI" modalities active

utilize into the


tools locking/unlocking button: activates
27 in "Manual" and "MDI" modality
electrospindle
maintenance
CMD_125

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 19/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

Fig. 22

Insert an empty cone and have the electric spindle rotate at 18000 rpm for about a minute.

At the end, stop the machine again, extract the tool cone and eliminate any grease deposited on the inside walls of
the electric spindle shaft with a cloth and, if necessary, with acetone (WARNING: ACETONE IS A FLAMMABLE
LIQUID!) (see fig. 24)
Also clean the hollow part of the tool cone (see fig. 25).

Fig. 24 Fig. 25

Chap. 20 - Pag. 20/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

Clean the cone outside and inside with a dry and clean cloth every week.

Every month clean the contact surfaces (shown in grey in the figure 26) between the tool tapers and the chuck
using acetone (CAUTION! FIRE HAZARD). Next, lubricate this area with the Teflub lubricant supplied (SCM:
0002400034A) Teflub is a dry, dustproof, waterproof lubricant which ensures correct clamping of the tool tapers.

NOTE: On tool holder tapers not supplied by manufacturer, perform this operation the first time the
tapers are used.

IMPORTANT: AS WELL AS OBSERVING THE WARNINGS ON THE CANISTER:


- DO NOT INHALE VAPOURS OR NEBULISED SUBSTANCES
- MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA USED IS WELL VENTILATED
- WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES IF CONTACT IS PROLONGED
- WEAR EYE PROTECTION

HSK63_05

Fig. 26

WARNING: If the machine remains switched off for a long period of time (more than one week), the
cone that stays mounted on the electro spindle must be carefully cleaned and lubricated.

-
(grano_su_hsk)

CAUTION: Check that grub screw D is always fitted in the tool-holder spindle:
if it is not fitted dust can get into the electro-spindle and cause malfunctions
and damage.
D

$-UM297c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 21/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.4.1 Centralised Lubrication Unit (OPTIONAL)


(a632_ceb1.0-20.4.2)

The centralised lubrication unit automatically lubricates the sliding devices on the X-Y-Z axes.
The unit consists of a grease tank A (Fig. 20.4.2a), a pneumatic pump B, and a level microswitch C which signals
when the tank is empty to the distributors.
The distributor is fitted with a microswitch which checks that the lubrication cycle is operating correctly.
Automatic lubrication is controlled by the Numeric Control operating the pump and displaying the message N°
PLC73 (Lubrication operating).

Fig. 20.4.2a

The error message N° PLC74 (Lubrication error) is caused by:


1 - Empty grease pump
2 - Fault in lubrication equipment.

- In case 1, refill the grease tank by injecting grease through the nipple D.
When the tank is completely full surplus grease will begin to flow out of the hole E.
Do not fill the grease tank 100% full so as to avoid straining the seals.

- Case 2 occurs when the microswitch on the distributor no longer detects the presence of grease.
In this case:
- complete the current operating cycle;
- press the STOP pushbutton on the N.C. to clear the error message;
- check if the error message N° PLC74 occurs again on the next lubrication cycle;
- if the error message appears again on the next lubrication cycle, first check all the electrical connections of
the microswitches, microswitch efficiency and then check for blockages in the lubrication equipment.

Chap. 20 - Pag. 22/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

Centralised lubrication diagram

C.N.C.

PAG 50

0V
24V

24V

$-UM233

Fig. 20.4.2b

If the lubrication interval needs adjusting (set at 180 minutes during testing) proceed as follows:

- press key "F6" in the basic menu to activate the "MDI" state
- go to the "ISO" field (Fig. 20.4.2c)
- type the command E30023=xxx (for CNC NUM) or command %ETK[23]=xxx (for CNC KVARA), or command
GW80=xxx (for CNC OSAI), substituting xxx with the new lubrication interval: the unit of measurement is
minutes
- press to confirm and press "start cycle" on the mobile control panel to acquire the new value.
invio

Fig. 20.4.2c

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 23/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.5 Table of greases and oils


(a632_ceb1.0-20.5)

GREASE FOR GEARS (Type "A")


(BORING HEADS, ROUTING UNITS)
KLUBER ISOFLEX NBU 15

GREASE FOR BEARINGS, SCREWS


AND RECIRCULATING BALL SHOES
(Type "B")
AGIP GR MU EP0
KLUBER MICROLUBE GL261

OIL FOR GEAR FILTER UNIT (Type "C")


KLUBER AIRPRESS 32
AGIP ACER 22
SHELL VITREA 25
MOBIL DTE N 1
ESSO NURAY 46

GREASE FOR CENTRALISED


LUBRICATION UNIT (Type "D")
AGIP GR MU EP0
KLUBER MICROLUBE GL261

NOTE: check the grease type contained in the device you wish to lubricate; never mix different
types of grease (sometimes it is possible to understand from the colour whether the original
grease is different from the new one you wish to add).

IMPORTANT! NEVER MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OF GREASE: mixing greases that have different
basic components can cause a chemical reaction which may consequently alter their lubricating
properties and, in some cases, may provoke solidification with subsequent seizure of the parts
intended to be lubricated.

The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for any damage arising from lubricating operations carried
out incorrectly or the use of lubricants different from those indicated.

Chap. 20 - Pag. 24/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

20.6 Maintenance table


(a632_ceb1.0-20.6)

CHART MAINTENANCE
Symbols
Turned on machine Out machine Adjustment mode” Control Cleaning Lubrification

ON OFF

CONTROLS TO EVERY STARTING OF THE MACHINE


Ref. on "Use and
Machine Type of
Ref. Device Ref. Description of the operation Maintenance
conditions intervention
Manual".”
To check that to the opening of
Safety Micro-switch on the door of
ON the perimeter fence A1 the door the machine him stops in Chap.2.1.5
"Emergency"
To check that to the pressure on
Red mushroom-heads push-buttons A2 the push button the machine him Chap.2.1.2
stops in "Emergency"
ON of stop of emergency
A A3
To check the correct restoration
from the state of emergency
Chap.2.1.2

To check that to the draught of


A4 the cable the machine him stops Chap.2.1.1
Emergency cable on the machine in "Emergency"
ON
To check the correct restore from
A5 the state of emergency
Chap.2.1.1

CONTROLS - CLEANING - LUBRICATION


Ref. on "Use and
Machine Type of
Ref. Frequency Device Ref. Description of the operation Maintenance
conditions intervention Manual"
Every 16 Unit filter-pressure Control / adjustment / I restore
regulator B1 levels / unloading condenses
Chap.20.3
hours or at
B OFF least once a
Recirculating ball screws
and sliding blocks "X"- B2 Lubrication Chap.20.4
day "Y"-"Z" axis
Electrical cabinet air
filters C1 Cleaning / washing / substitution Chap.20.3
OFF
Vacuum pump filters C2 Cleaning / substitution Chap.20.3
Centralised Lubrication Check level of the grease / Restore
OFF Every 40 pump C3 level
Chap.20.4.2
hours or at
C OFF least once a
Recirculating ball sliding
block for electro-sp. C4 Lubrification Chap.9…
support
week
Recirculating ball sliding
OFF block for tools cribs C5 Lubrification Chap.10…

Electrospindles and
toolholders C6 Cleaning / Lubrification Chap.20.4.1

OFF
Compressed air tank D1 Unloading condense Chap.20.3.1
Every 180
hours or at
D OFF
least once a
Unit pressure regulator D2 Check / regolation Chap.20.3.2

month
6000rpm boring heads D3 Cleaning / spindles lubrication Chap.20.4
ON _ _
Every 1000
hours or at Chap.20.4
E ON _ least every
Boring heads E1 Gears lubrification
Chap.8…
six months

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 25/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.6.1 Programmed maintenance card


(a632_ceb1.0-20.6.1)

CARD FOR PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE


Page 1/2
Machine :

Model :

Serial number :

For the operations of control / cleaning / lubrification is necessary to follow the


indications of the "CHART OF MAINTENANCE" (chap. 20.6)

- To every starting of the machine to perform the controls of the Ref. A


- Daily to execute the controls / cleaning / lubrification of the Ref. B

Signature employed to the


Week Month Reference to the operations to be performed
maintenance
1 January C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
2 January C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
3 January C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
4 January C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
5 January C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
6 February C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
7 February C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
8 February C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
9 February C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
10 March C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
11 March C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
12 March C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
13 March C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
14 April C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
15 April C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
16 April C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
17 April C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
18 May C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
19 May C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
20 May C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
21 May C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
22 May C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
23 Juni C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
24 Juni C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
25 Juni C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
26 Juni C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 E1

Chap. 20 - Pag. 26/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

CARD FOR PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE


Page 1/2
Machine :

Model :

Serial number :

For the operations of control / cleaning / lubrification is necessary to follow the


indications of the "CHART OF MAINTENANCE" (chap. 20.6)

- To every starting of the machine to perform the controls of the Ref. A


- Daily to execute the controls / cleaning / lubrification of the Ref. B

Signature employed to the


Week Month Reference to the operations to be performed
maintenance
27 July C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
28 July C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
29 July C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
30 July C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
31 July C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
32 August C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
33 August C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
34 August C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
35 August C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
36 September C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
37 September C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
38 September C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
39 September C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
40 October C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
41 October C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
42 October C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
43 October C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
44 November C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
45 November C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
46 November C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
47 November C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
48 November C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3
49 December C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
50 December C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
51 December C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
52 December C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D1 D2 D3 E1

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 27/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

20.7 Inconvenients, causes and solutions (showing by NCC)


(a632_ceb1.0-20.7)

IMPORTANT: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE CHECKED ONLY BY SPECIALISED


TECHNICIANS.

Any inconveniences that occur can be signaled directly by the CNC on the operator interface.
Error messages will appear next to each inconvenience.
The causes and the methods of intervention are described for each message as follows.

PLC1 = SET-UP AXES DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on one of the A, B, C axis drives

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

PLC2 = MOTOR OVERLOAD


DESCRIPTION: Three-phase motor overload tripped

CAUSE: One or more overloads are tripped


SOLUTION: Check the status of the overloads in the electrical cabinet. To reset, press the relative push-
button.

PLC3 = INSUFF. AIR PRESSURE


DESCRIPTION: Supply system air pressure is less than 4 Atm.

CAUSE: Mains compressed air supply is off or faulty


The main regulator adjustment is incorrect
SOLUTION: Check the facility’s mains supply system
Increase the pressure by turning the regulator knob clockwise

PLC4 = MACHINE EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: The power supply to the power circuit is off

CAUSE: Emergency cord or overloads are activated


SOLUTION: Reset by pressing the "RESET EMERGENCY" push-button on the control panel
CAUSE: Accident prevention overload switches are disabled
SOLUTION: Re-enable the accident prevention overload switches, proceed as above
CAUSE: Machining unit overtravel (if present, also PLC10 - PLC15 , PLC17 - PLC18)
SOLUTION: Manually position the machining unit within the limits allowed

PLC5 = BRUSHLESS AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on one of the X, Y, Z axis drives

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation.
SOLUTION: reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service.

PLC6 = X AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the X axis drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

Chap. 20 - Pag. 28/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC7 = Y AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the y axis

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

PLC8 = Z AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the z axis drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

PLC9 = A AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the A axis drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

PLC10 = X+ AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The X axis is beyond the positive direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

PLC11 = X- AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The X axis is beyond the negative direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

PLC12 = Y+ AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The Y axis is beyond the positive direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

PLC13 = Y- AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The Y axis is beyond the negative direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

PLC14 = Z+AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The Z axis is beyond the positive direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

PLC15 = Z- AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The Z axis is beyond the negative direction stroke limits

CAUSE: The axis is positioned at a dimension outside the limits allowed


SOLUTION: Manually position the axis within the limits allowed or carry out calibration

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 29/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

PLC16 = C AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the C axis drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

PLC17 = A- AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The A axis is on the negative direction stroke limits

CAUSE: SW end of stroke parameter error


SOLUTION: Correct the SW end of stroke value in the "AXIS" parameters
CAUSE: The end of stroke contact microswitch is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the contact microswitch
CAUSE: The contact microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC18 = A+ AXIS LIMIT SWITCH


DESCRIPTION: The A axis is on the positive direction stroke limits

CAUSE: SW end of stroke parameter error


SOLUTION: Correct the SW end of stroke value in the "AXIS" parameters
CAUSE: The end of stroke contact microswitch is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the contact microswitch
CAUSE: The contact microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC19 = AWAITING MAGAZINE OUT POSITION (rapid)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC20 = AWAITING MAGAZINE IN POSITION (rapid)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC21 = AWAITING MAGAZINE DOWN POSITION (rapid)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

Chap. 20 - Pag. 30/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC22 = AWAITING TOOL MAGAZINE UP POSITION (rapid)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC23 = AWAITING TOOL RELEASE


DESCRIPTION: There was a tool change-over phase error during tool release

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The proximity switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC24 = AWAITING TOOL LOCKING


DESCRIPTION: There was a tool change-over phase error during tool locking

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The proximity switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC25 = AWAITING ELECTROSPINDLE TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: There was an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle
to reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: There is insufficient pressure for the electrospindle upstroke
SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator

PLC26 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POSITION 1


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC27 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POSITION 2


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 31/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC28 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POSITION 3
DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC29 = WAITING FOR HOOD IN TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: The extractor hood did not reach the required position during a tool change-over

CAUSE: Jamming
SOLUTION: Check visually and eliminate any jamming
CAUSE: Faulty limit switches, or broken connecting cables
SOLUTION: Substitute any parts considered faulty

PLC30 = TOOL CHANGE-OVER CYCLE IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is carrying out a tool change-over operation

PLC31 = MAGAZINE CALIBRATION CYCLE IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is carrying out tool magazine calibration

PLC32 = AXIS CALIBRATION CYCLE IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is calibrating the X - Y - Z - A axes

PLC33 = WAITING FOR START PUSH-BUTTON


DESCRIPTION: The CNC requests start to begin the calibration cycle

CAUSE: You have accessed the calibration page


SOLUTION: Press the "START" button to begin calibration

PLC34 = AXIS CALIBRATION COMPLETE


DESCRIPTION: This message appears on accessing the calibration page after calibration is
completed

PLC35 = X AXIS CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Calibration was not carried out correctly on the X axis

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

PLC36 = Y AXIS CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Calibration was not carried out correctly on the Y axis

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

Chap. 20 - Pag. 32/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC37 = Z AXIS CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Calibration was not carried out correctly on the Z axis

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

PLC38 = A AXIS CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Calibration was not carried out correctly on the A axis

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

PLC39 = MAGAZINE CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Tool magazine calibration was not carried out correctly

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The microswitch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

PLC40 = MACHINE IN STANDBY - PRESS START TO CONTINUE


DESCRIPTION: Suspension of the current machining has been requested by entering the instruction
SET STANDBY in the program

CAUSE: You have requested suspension of the current machining cycle


SOLUTION: Press the START push-button to continue machining

PLC41 = BATTERY VOLTAGE INSUFFICIENT


DESCRIPTION: The NC indicates that the back-up battery which keeps the RAM memory powered up
when there is no power supply has reached its minimum voltage level (is almost flat)

CAUSE: Flat battery


SOLUTION: Substitute the battery as soon as possible. In the meantime, do not turn off the CNC or data
may be lost

PLC42 = ELECTROSPINDLE RECONNECTION IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The inverter was reset from the emergency state and the electrospindle is rotating without
control

CAUSE: The inverter was reset from the emergency state


ACTION: Wait until the electrospindle has stopped

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 33/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC43 = SELECT THE MACHINE EMERGENCY STATE
DESCRIPTION: The inverter is in the emergency state and the electrospindle is rotating without control
CAUSE: Inverter in emergency state

SOLUTION: Press the mushroom-head push-button to generate a machine emergency and reset the
machine from the emergency state

PLC44 = WAITING FOR UNIT ROTATION


DESCRIPTION: When machining with the boring head or cutter disk, the unit descends but does not rotate

CAUSE: Power relay broken


ACTION: Substitute the power relay

PLC45 = WAITING FOR AREA AB PANEL LOCKING


DESCRIPTION: The machine waits until the suction cup vacuum sensor in the area in
which the program is executed indicates that the workpiece has been locked in place

CAUSE: Vacuum presence pressure regulator faulty or incorrectly calibrated


SOLUTION: Substitute the pressure regulator, or calibrate the pressure regulator,
consulting the technical support service
CAUSE: Suction cup filter blocked
SOLUTION: Clean the suction cup filter
CAUSE: The panel being machined does not close the suction cups
SOLUTION: Check panel porosity. Check that its surface is not curved

PLC46 = MOBILE CONTROL PANEL ENABLED


DESCRIPTION: If the machine has a mobile push-button panel, this indicates that it has been enabled

SOLUTION: Use the relative selector to disable the mobile push-button panel

PLC47 = SETTING MODE


DESCRIPTION: The machine is operating in SETTING mode (the spindles do not turn, and the axes
work at a speed of 2m/min.)

CAUSE: The "SETTING" selector has been activated


SOLUTION: Turn the SETTING selector to "0"

PLC48 = INVERTER FREQUENCY ERROR


DESCRIPTION: The NC reads the inverter continuously in the acceleration or deceleration phase.

CAUSE: Inverter broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the inverter
CAUSE: Inverter parameters are incorrect
SOLUTION: Check the parameters against the print-out provided
CAUSE: Faulty 0 frequency relay or faulty frequency reached
SOLUTION: Substitute the faulty relay.

PLC49 = INVERTER 1 EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: The inverter which controls the electrospindles is in the emergency state

CAUSE: The acceleration and deceleration times are too short


SOLUTION: Increase the value in the inverter parameters, consulting the inverter technical manual
CAUSE: There is a fault in the electrical circuits
SOLUTION: Consult the inverter technical manual, and the technical support service

Chap. 20 - Pag. 34/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC50 = INVERTER 2 EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: The inverter which controls the electrospindles is in the emergency state

CAUSE: The acceleration and deceleration times are too short


SOLUTION: Increase the value in the inverter parameters, consulting the inverter technical manual
CAUSE: There is a fault in the electrical circuits
SOLUTION: Consult the inverter technical manual, and the technical support service

PLC51 = INVERTER 3 EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: The inverter which controls the electrospindles is in the emergency state

CAUSE: The acceleration and deceleration times are too short


SOLUTION: Increase the value in the inverter parameters, consulting the inverter technical manual
CAUSE: There is a fault in the electrical circuits
SOLUTION: Consult the inverter technical manual, and the technical support service

PLC52 = INVERTER 4 EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: The inverter which controls the electrospindles is in the emergency state

CAUSE: The acceleration and deceleration times are too short


SOLUTION: Increase the value in the inverter parameters, consulting the inverter technical manual
CAUSE: There is a fault in the electrical circuits
SOLUTION: Consult the inverter technical manual, and the technical support service

PLC53 = WAITING FOR AREA CD PANEL LOCKING


DESCRIPTION: The machine waits until the suction cup vacuum sensor in the area in
which the program is executed indicates that the workpiece has been locked in place

CAUSE: Vacuum presence pressure regulator faulty or incorrectly calibrated


SOLUTION: Substitute the pressure regulator, or calibrate the pressure regulator,
consulting the technical support service
CAUSE: Suction cup filter blocked
SOLUTION: Clean the suction cup filter
CAUSE: The panel being machined does not close the suction cups
SOLUTION: Check panel porosity. Check that its surface is not curved.

PLC54 = TWIN-PACK 5 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 5

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC55 = TWIN-PACK 6 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 6

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 35/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC56 = TOOL CHANGE-OVER ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT
DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the tool change-over electrospindle

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC57 = TWIN-PACK 1 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 1

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC58 = TWIN-PACK 2 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 2

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC59 = TWIN-PACK 3 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 3

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC60 = TWIN-PACK 4 ELECTROSPINDLE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on electrospindle 4

CAUSE: The electrospindle is overheated


SOLUTION: Check the extractor system
CAUSE: The electrospindle motor is faulty
SOLUTION: Call the support service

PLC61 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO OPEN


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC62 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE OPEN PROTECTION


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

Chap. 20 - Pag. 36/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC63 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO CLOSE


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC64 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE PROTECTION TO CLOSE


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC65 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE UP

DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle to
reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Insufficient pressure for electrospindle upstroke
SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator

PLC66 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POS. 1


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC67 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POS. 2


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC68 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POS. 3


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during electrospindle positioning.

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 37/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC69 = WAITING FOR SHUTTLE UP
DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the shuttle to go up

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Jamming
SOLUTION: Check that the shuttle runs along the two guide rods correctly

PLC70 = WAITING FOR SHUTTLE DOWN


DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the shuttle to come
down

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The magnetic limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Jamming
SOLUTION: Check that the shuttle runs along the two guide rods correctly

PLC71 = WAITING FOR LOCKED TOOL


DESCRIPTION: There is a tool locking error during the tool change-over

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The proximity switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC72 = WAITING FOR TOOL RELEASED


DESCRIPTION: There is a tool release error during the tool change-over

CAUSE: A microswitch is broken


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The proximity switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC73 = LUBRICATION IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is running the timed lubricating cycle

CAUSE: After a predetermined number of working hours, the CNC activates the lubricating cycle without
interrupting the current processes
SOLUTION: wait for the message to disappear

PLC74 = LUBRICATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: The timed lubricating device cannot carry out the lubricating cycle correctly

CAUSE: Grease tank empty


SOLUTION: Fill tank with grease (see section Centralised Lubrication Unit)
CAUSE: Circuit tube interruption
SOLUTION: Check the tubes and eliminate any bends or other causes which may prevent the grease from
circulating correctly
CAUSE: Microswitch on pump
SOLUTION: Check that microswitch "C" on the pump is undamaged and is functioning correctly (see sec.
Centralised Lubrication Unit)
CAUSE: Microswitch on distributor
SOLUTION: Check that the microswitch on the first grease distributor is undamaged and is functioning
correctly (see sec. Centralised Lubrication Unit). NOTE: To clear the message on the display, press the
"RESET ALARMS" push-button on the CNC keyboard

Chap. 20 - Pag. 38/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC75 = LUBRICATING PUMP EMPTY


DESCRIPTION: There is no grease on the pump

CAUSE: There is no grease on the pump


SOLUTION: Refill will grease to the level indicated through the filler cap

PLC76 = TOOL CHANGE-OVER FAULT


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred in the tool change-over electrospindle unit

CAUSE: The magazine is not in the OUT position


SOLUTION: Open the TEST I/O page and force the magazine into the correct position
CAUSE: Faulty sensor.
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Faulty solenoid valve
SOLUTION: Substitute the solenoid valve
CAUSE: Tool released
SOLUTION: Check that the tool locking sensor is in good condition and functions correctly
CAUSE: Tool change-over electrospindle is not in the UP position
SOLUTION: Check that the electrospindle UP sensor is in good condition and functions correctly

PLC77 = NO TOOL IN ELECTROSPINDLE


DESCRIPTION: The NC awaits the load tool command

CAUSE: You have requested manual unloading of a tool that was not previously loaded
SOLUTION: To carry out this operation, load the tool

DESCRIPTION: There is no tool in the electrospindle programmed for machining

CAUSE: Faulty tie rod microswitch


SOLUTION: Adjust or substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: No tool in selected magazine location
SOLUTION: Place tool in magazine location

PLC79 = OPERATOR HOODS UP


DESCRIPTION: Message indicates that the hoods have been forced up

CAUSE: You pressed the button which forces up the hoods on the electrospindle
SOLUTION: Press the button which lowers the hoods and clear the message

PLC80 = TOOL OUT OF POSITION


DESCRIPTION: The tool to be used for machining (cutter disk 0 - 90) is not in the correct position

CAUSE: Faulty control limit switch


SOLUTION: Substitute the limit switch
CAUSE: The limit switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC81 = WAITING FOR PANEL ON AB SIDE BOTTOM STOPS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is waiting for the panel to be brought into contact with the side stops in
area AB

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Insufficient pressure in the pneumatic cylinder
SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure with the relative regulator

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 39/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

PLC82 = MANUAL TOOL CHANGE-OVER ON ELECTROSPINDLE 1


DESCRIPTION: The NC is waiting for you to manually load the tool on or unload it from the requested
electrospindle

CAUSE: The machine has no tool magazine


SOLUTION: Manually load the tool, pressing the “lock/release” push-button on the mobile control panel then
press “F1” to confirm.
CAUSE: You are using a tool which is catalogued in an external magazine
SOLUTION: See above

PLC83 = PHOTOCELL HOLD - PRESS START TO CONTINUE


DESCRIPTION: Machining is suspended due to interference with the machining unit

CAUSE: The protection photocell was activated during the tool change-over
SOLUTION: Remove the object which activated the photocell, then press START

PLC84 = PHOTOCELL EMERGENCY


DESCRIPTION: During an I/O test tool change-over the photocells generated an emergency on the
CNC

CAUSE: There is an obstacle between the mobile unit and the tool magazine during the request for an I/O
test tool change-over
SOLUTION: Remove the obstacle which has triggered the photocells and press the "RESET ALARMS"
push-button on the CNC keyboard
CAUSE: You are using a tool which is catalogued in an external magazine
SOLUTION: See above

PLC85 = MANUAL TOOL CHANGE-OVER ON ELECTROSPINDLE 2


DESCRIPTION: The NC is waiting for you to manually load the tool on or unload it from the requested
electrospindle

CAUSE: The machine has no tool magazine


SOLUTION: Manually load the tool, pressing the “lock/release” push-button on the mobile control panel then
press “F1” to confirm.
CAUSE: You are using a tool which is catalogued in an external magazine
SOLUTION: See above

PLC86 = MANUAL TOOL CHANGE-OVER ON ELECTROSPINDLE 3


DESCRIPTION: The NC is waiting for you to manually load the tool on or unload it from the requested
electrospindle

CAUSE: The machine has no tool magazine


SOLUTION: Manually load the tool, pressing the “lock/release” push-button on the mobile control panel then
press “F1” to confirm.
CAUSE: You are using a tool which is catalogued in an external magazine
SOLUTION: See above

Chap. 20 - Pag. 40/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC87 = MANUAL TOOL CHANGE-OVER ON ELECTROSPINDLE 4


DESCRIPTION: The NC is waiting for you to manually load the tool on or unload it from the requested
electrospindle

CAUSE: The machine has no tool magazine


SOLUTION: Manually load the tool, pressing the “lock/release” push-button on the mobile control panel then
press “F1” to confirm.
CAUSE: You are using a tool which is catalogued in an external magazine
SOLUTION: See above

PLC88 = PRESS F1 TO CONFIRM TOOL UNLOADING


DESCRIPTION: A manual tool change-over is in progress. The machine requests confirmation that
unloading is complete

SOLUTION: press F1 on the mobile push-button panel to confirm unloading.

PLC89 = WITHDRAW MAGAZINE


DESCRIPTION: The rear magazine cannot close

CAUSE: A tool has been unloaded, the magazine is full and cannot close
SOLUTION: Select the MANUAL TESTS page and free at least one magazine tool location
CAUSE: Calibration has begun with the magazine open
CAUSE: The automatic cycle has begun with the magazine open
SOLUTION: Select the MANUAL TESTS page and close the magazine

PLC90 = PRESS F1 TO CONFIRM TOOL LOADING


DESCRIPTION: A manual tool change-over is in progress. The machine requests confirmation that
loading is complete

SOLUTION: press F1 on the mobile push-button panel to confirm loading.

PLC91 = WAITING FOR START PUSH-BUTTON TO BE PRESSED


DESCRIPTION: The machine awaits your command to continue machining

CAUSE: You have selected SINGLE MOVEMENT mode


SOLUTION: Press the START push-button to carry out subsequent machining, or disable SINGLE
MOVEMENT

PLC92 = NO EDIT
DESCRIPTION: The keyswitch is set to the no edit position. In this mode you cannot edit
programs and lists

CAUSE: The keyswitch on the mobile control panel is in the no edit position.
SOLUTION: Return the keyswitch to the central position to restore machine standard
operation.

PLC93 = NO MODE
DESCRIPTION: The keyswitch is in the no mode position. In this mode you cannot change the
machine operating mode

CAUSE: The keyswitch on the mobile control panel is in the no mode position.
SOLUTION: Return the keyswitch to the central position to restore machine standard
operation.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 41/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC94 = NO VACUUM
DESCRIPTION: During or at the start of the machining program, the NC does not receive the
workpiece locked indication

CAUSE: Vacuum presence detection pressure regulator faulty or incorrectly calibrated


SOLUTION: Substitute the pressure regulator and calibrate it, consulting the technical support service
CAUSE: The suction cup filter is blocked
SOLUTION: Clean the suction cup filter
CAUSE: The panel being machined does not close the suction cups
SOLUTION: Check the porosity of the panel. Check that the panel surface is not curved

PLC95 = PROG. DOES NOT EXIST ON FIELD REQUESTED


DESCRIPTION: You have requested the program to start on a machining field without having enabled
the NC for the machining

CAUSE: The panel is mounted on a different field to that programmed on the NC


SOLUTION: Move the panel to the enabled field. Change the machining field in the program HEADER

PLC96 = ZERO FEED RATE


DESCRIPTION: The axis speed is zero

CAUSE: The axis speed setting selector is set to zero


SOLUTION: Turn the selector to set the desired speed (the axis in question starts automatically and the
message disappears)

PLC97 = WAITING FOR TOOL PROTECTION UP


DESCRIPTION: The protection has not reached the UP position

CAUSE: Jamming
SOLUTION: Remove the cause of the jamming
CAUSE: Pneumatic cylinder
SOLUTION: Check that air is supplied to the cylinder
CAUSE: Positioning sensor
SOLUTION: Check that the sensor is undamaged and functions correctly

PLC98 = WAITING FOR TOOL PROTECTION DOWN


DESCRIPTION: The protection has not reached the down position

CAUSE: Jamming
SOLUTION: Remove the cause of the jamming
CAUSE: Pneumatic cylinder
SOLUTION: Check that air is supplied to the cylinder
CAUSE: Positioning sensor
SOLUTION: Check that the sensor is undamaged and functions correctly

PLC99 = PRESS F2 TO CONFIRM


DESCRIPTION: The machine requests confirmation of panel unloading due to the emergency in
progress

SOLUTION: Press F2 to confirm unloading due to the emergency

Chap. 20 - Pag. 42/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC100 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO POSITION 1


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC101 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO POSITION 2


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC102 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO POSITION 3


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC103 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO POSITION 4


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC104 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE UP


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 43/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC105 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE DOWN
DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC106 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO MOVE LEFT


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC107 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE TO MOVE RIGHT


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC108 = WAITING FOR TOOL LOCK ON ELECTROSPINDLE 1


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool locking in electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC109 = WAITING FOR TOOL LOCK ON ELECTROSPINDLE 2


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool locking in electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

Chap. 20 - Pag. 44/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC110 = WAITING FOR TOOL LOCK ON ELECTROSPINDLE 3


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool locking in electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC111 = WAITING FOR TOOL LOCK ON ELECTROSPINDLE 4


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool locking in electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC112 = WAITING FOR TOOL RELEASE ON ELECTROSPINDLE 1


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool release from electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC113 = WAITING FOR TOOL RELEASE ON ELECTROSPINDLE 2


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool release from electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC114 = WAITING FOR TOOL RELEASE ON ELECTROSPINDLE 3


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool release from electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 45/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC115 = WAITING FOR TOOL RELEASE ON ELECTROSPINDLE 4
DESCRIPTION: Error during tool release from electrospindle

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC116 = SELECTED LOCATION NOT EMPTY


DESCRIPTION: Error during tool change-over with "random" magazine management

CAUSE: Operator error in loading tools into magazine


SOLUTION: Check exact position of the tools in the magazine using the TEST I/O page
CAUSE: Faulty microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: The proximity switch connecting cable is broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC117 = NO TOOL IN SELECTED LOCATION


DESCRIPTION: The machine has not performed tool unloading

CAUSE: The load tool command has been given for an empty magazine location
SOLUTION: Load the tool manually or load the magazine

PLC118 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE 1 IN TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle to
reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: There is insufficient pressure for the electrospindle upstroke


SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator
CAUSE: Faulty sensor
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC119 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE 2 IN TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle to
reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: There is insufficient pressure for the electrospindle upstroke


SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator
CAUSE: Faulty sensor
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

Chap. 20 - Pag. 46/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC120 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE 3 IN TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle to
reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: There is insufficient pressure for the electrospindle upstroke


SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator
CAUSE: Faulty sensor
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC121 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE 4 IN TOOL CHANGE-OVER POSITION


DESCRIPTION: There is an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle to
reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: There is insufficient pressure for the electrospindle upstroke


SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator
CAUSE: Faulty sensor
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC122 = WAITING FOR PANEL ON CD SIDE BOTTOM STOPS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is waiting for the panel to be brought into contact with the side stops in
area CD

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Insufficient pressure in the pneumatic cylinder
SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure with the relative regulator

PLC123 = CONFIRM CONVEYOR UNLOADING


DESCRIPTION: The machine requests confirmation of panel unloading due to the emergency in
progress. The message appears with PLC 99: PRESS F2 TO CONFIRM

PLC124 = UNLOADING DUE TO EMERGENCY IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: The message appears with PLC123 and PLC99. The machine indicates
that panel unloading is in progress due to the emergency

PLC125 = AB UNLOADING INHIBITED


DESCRIPTION: The machine is waiting for unloading

CAUSE: The machining unit is above the panel


SOLUTION: Move the machining unit

PLC126 = CD UNLOADING INHIBITED


DESCRIPTION: The machine is waiting for unloading

CAUSE: The machining unit is above the panel


SOLUTION: Move the machining unit

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 47/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN

PLC127 = MACHINING UNIT


DESCRIPTION: The machine is waiting for unloading

CAUSE: The machining unit is above the panel


SOLUTION: Move the machining unit

PLC128 = UNLOADER
DESCRIPTION: ---

CAUSE: ---
SOLUTION: -----

PLC129 = CALIBRATE WORKTABLES AND SUCTION CUPS


DESCRIPTION: The machine requests worktable and suction cup calibration before loading a panel

CAUSE: You turned the selector to enable the worktables and suction cups on the NC
SOLUTION: Calibrate the worktables and suction cups

PLC130 = CONNECTION NOT MADE


DESCRIPTION: The worktable and suction cup positioning unit did not connect with the suction cup

CAUSE: The suction cup was moved manually


SOLUTION: Calibrate the worktables and suction cups
CAUSE: The suction cup is dirty
SOLUTION: Clean the suction cup
CAUSE: Broken microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch

PLC131 = WAITING FOR WORKTABLE AND SUCTION CUP POSITIONING UNIT DOWN
DESCRIPTION: The positioning unit did not reach the DOWN position

CAUSE: Broken microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Broken solenoid valve.
SOLUTION: Substitute the solenoid valve

PLC132 = WAITING FOR WORKTABLE AND SUCTION CUP POSITIONING UNIT UP


DESCRIPTION: The positioning unit did not reach the UP position

CAUSE: Broken microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Broken solenoid valve.
SOLUTION: Substitute the solenoid valve

PLC133 = AXIS B DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the axis B drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service

Chap. 20 - Pag. 48/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC134 = AXIS B CALIBRATION ERROR


DESCRIPTION: Calibration was not carried out correctly on the B axis

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Motor driver fault
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and then on again. If the problem persists contact the support service

PLC135 = LUBRICATE MACHINE


DESCRIPTION: Lubrication request

CAUSE: The machine requests a lubricating cycle


SOLUTION: Open the Xilog MDI page (press push-button F6), then press F2 to open
the set of ISO instructions and type the command M198. Press Enter and start NC.

PLC136 = TOOL WORN

SOLUTION: Check that the dimensions set in the tooling are still valid relative to the actual dimensions. If
not, enter the tooling again with the correct values measured on the tool.

PLC137 = FEELING ERROR


DESCRIPTION: The feeling function was not performed correctly

CAUSE: Programming error


SOLUTION: Check the program parameters again
CAUSE: Faulty feeler microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch

PLC138 = SERIAL TIME OUT


DESCRIPTION: Communications problem between NC and driver

CAUSE: Connecting cable broken


SOLUTION: Check the connecting cable

PLC139 = SERIAL AXIS DRIVE FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault on the serial axis drive

CAUSE: No DRIVE power. For other causes consult the DRIVE technical documentation
SOLUTION: Reset the overload switch. Consult the technical support service.

PLC140 = WORKTABLE AND SUCTION CUP GENERAL POSITIONING ERROR


DESCRIPTION: The machine stopped during worktable and suction cup positioning

CAUSE: The driver of one of the worktables or suction cups is not communicating with the NC
SOLUTION: Calibrate the worktables and suction cups. If the error persists, substitute the driver

PLC141 = Rapid 1
DESCRIPTION: This message (associated with other screen messages) indicates which
electrospindle the messages on the screen refer to

PLC142 = Rapid 2
DESCRIPTION: This message (associated with other screen messages) indicates which
electrospindle the messages on the screen refer to

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 49/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC143 = BUSHINGS MISSING ERROR, PRESS START TO RESTART
DESCRIPTION: The bushing did not pass through the toroidal sensor at the start of the firing tube
CAUSE: Insufficient bushings in feeder.
SOLUTION: Add the quantity of bushings indicated in the technical specifications
CAUSE: A faulty bushing is jammed in the linear channel of the vibrating feeder or in the selector.
SOLUTION: Manually remove the bushing and press the start push-button on the mobile control panel

PLC144 = BUSHING INSERTER WASHING CYCLE IN PROGRESS


DESCRIPTION: Machine is emptying bushings from pipe

CAUSE: The machine is calibrating or is resetting after jamming


SOLUTION: Stop the machine procedures. The cycle eventually restarts automatically

PLC145 = WAIT FOR BUSHINGS ON INSERTER UNIT


DESCRIPTION: the bushing did not pass through the toroidal sensor at the end of the firing tube. The
air jet continues until the transit signal is received

CAUSE: The firing tube is disconnected and the bushing is inside the tube.
SOLUTION: Reconnect the tube and the machine restarts automatically.
CAUSE: The firing tube is disconnected and the bushing is lost.
SOLUTION: Reconnect the tube and press the "Bushing inserter unit washing" pushbutton
CAUSE: The bushing was obstructed by a deformation in the nylon tube.
SOLUTION: Check whether or not the tube needs substituting, or if you can simply manually adjust the tube

PLC146 = WAIT FOR INSERTER UNIT LOWERING


DESCRIPTION: The inserter unit pneumatic selection cylinder lower sensor did not indicate
completion of the stroke

CAUSE: A mechanical obstacle prevents unit movement


SOLUTION: Remove the obstacle
CAUSE: The sensor is damaged
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: The pneumatic solenoid valve is not working
SOLUTION: Substitute the solenoid valve

PLC147 = WAIT FOR INSERTER LOWERED


DESCRIPTION: The inserter sensor did not indicate the insertion punch stroke

CAUSE: Due to dust, a bushing obstructs the mechanical punch downstroke guide
SOLUTION: Remove the obstruction
CAUSE: The sensor is damaged
SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: The pneumatic solenoid valve is not functioning
SOLUTION: Substitute the solenoid valve

PLC148 = WAIT FOR INSERTER UNIT RAISED


DESCRIPTION: The inserter unit cylinder sensor did not indicate the complete return stroke of the
pneumatic selection piston

CAUSE: A mechanical obstruction prevents unit movement


SOLUTION: Remove the obstruction

Chap. 20 - Pag. 50/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC149 = SIMULATION NOT POSSIBLE

CAUSE: You selected simulated mode


SOLUTION: Deselect simulated mode

PLC150 = AREA AB MACHINING WITH CLAMPS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is machining with the clamps enabled in field AB

CAUSE: You enabled the area AB clamps selector


SOLUTION: Turn the area AB clamps selector to “0”.

PLC151 = AREA CD MACHINING WITH CLAMPS


DESCRIPTION: The machine is machining with the clamps enabled in field CD

CAUSE: You enabled the area CD clamps selector


SOLUTION: Turn the area CD clamps selector to “0”.

PLC152 = AREA AB CLAMPS RAISED PNEUMATICALLY


DESCRIPTION: The clamps in area AB are raised

CAUSE: You enabled the area AB clamps upstroke selector


SOLUTION: Turn the area AB clamps downstroke selector

PLC153 = AREA CD CLAMPS RAISED PNEUMATICALLY


DESCRIPTION: The clamps in area CD are raised

CAUSE: You enabled the area CD clamps upstroke selector


SOLUTION: Turn the area CD clamps downstroke selector

PLC154 = MAGAZINE NOT IN POSITION


DESCRIPTION: An error occurred in the tool change-over electrospindle unit

CAUSE: The magazine is not in the DOWN position


SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the magazine into the correct position
CAUSE: The magazine is not in the rear position
SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the magazine into the correct position
CAUSE: The rapid magazine is not in the UP position
SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the magazine into the correct position
CAUSE: The rapid magazine is not in the OUT position
SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the magazine into the correct position
CAUSE: The tool change-over electrospindle is not in the UP position
SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the electrospindle into the correct position
CAUSE: The tool change-over electrospindle is released
SOLUTION: Open the Test I/O page and force the electrospindle into the correct position

PLC155 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE UP


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: Faulty Magazine UP microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Microswitch connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 51/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC156 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE DOWN
DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: Faulty Magazine UP microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Faulty Magazine DOWN microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Microswitch connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC157 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE FORWARD (Y-)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: Faulty FORWARD position microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Faulty BACK position microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Microswitch connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC158 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE FORWARD (Y+)


DESCRIPTION: An error is activated during automatic or manual movement of the tool magazine

CAUSE: Faulty FORWARD position microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Faulty BACK position microswitch
SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Microswitch connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable

PLC159 = 10% INVERTER FAULT


DESCRIPTION: There is a fault in the electrospindle speed of rotation

CAUSE: The electrospindle is not rotating at the speed set


SOLUTION: Check the inverter.

PLC160 = EL. 1 REFRIGERATOR PRESSURE SWITCH

CAUSE: The mains supply is shut off or faulty. The main regulator calibration is insufficient
SOLUTION: Check the system

PLC161 = EL. 2 REFRIGERATOR PRESSURE SWITCH

CAUSE: The mains supply is shut off or faulty. The main regulator calibration is insufficient
SOLUTION: Check the system

Chap. 20 - Pag. 52/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

PLC162 = SUCTION CUPS NOT LOCKED ON WORKTABLE AB


DESCRIPTION: The mains air pressure is too low

CAUSE: The mains supply is shut off or faulty. The main regulator calibration is insufficient
SOLUTION: Check the system which supplies the facility. Increase the pressure by turning
the regulator knob clockwise

PLC163 = SUCTION CUPS NOT LOCKED ON WORKTABLE CD


DESCRIPTION: The mains air pressure is too low

CAUSE: The mains supply is shut off or faulty. The main regulator calibration is insufficient
SOLUTION: Check the system which supplies the facility. Increase the pressure by turning
the regulator knob clockwise.

PLC164 = AREA AB CYCLE NOT OK


DESCRIPTION: The loading sequence is incorrect

CAUSE: The correct workpiece loading sequence was not followed


SOLUTION: Perform the cycle as indicated below:
1) Move the mobile bridge away from the loading zone
2) Check that the warning light on the worktable is OFF
3) Step onto the mat to load the panel
4) Step off the mat
5) Press the START cycle push-button

PLC165 = AREA CD CYCLE NOT OK


DESCRIPTION: The loading sequence is incorrect

CAUSE: The correct workpiece loading sequence was not followed


SOLUTION: Perform the cycle as indicated below:
1) Move the mobile bridge away from the loading zone
2) Check that the warning light on the worktable is OFF
3) Step onto the mat to load the panel
4) Step off the mat
5) Press the START cycle push-button

PLC204 = WAITING FOR ELECTROSPINDLE POSITION 0


DESCRIPTION: There was an error during the tool change-over. The NC waits for the electrospindle
to reach the upper tool change-over position

CAUSE: Faulty microswitch


SOLUTION: Substitute the microswitch
CAUSE: Microswitch connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Insufficient pressure for electrospindle upstroke
SOLUTION: Adjust the pressure regulator

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 53/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
PLC205 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE POSITION 5
DESCRIPTION: There was an error during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC206 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE POSITION 6


DESCRIPTION: There was an error during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC207 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE POSITION 7


DESCRIPTION: There was an error during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLC208 = WAITING FOR MAGAZINE POSITION 8


DESCRIPTION: There was an error during magazine positioning

CAUSE: Faulty sensor


SOLUTION: Substitute the sensor
CAUSE: Sensor connecting cable broken
SOLUTION: Substitute the cable
CAUSE: Solenoid valve malfunction
SOLUTION: Check coil is working properly

PLCxxx = xxxxxxxxx
DESCRIPTION: xxxxxxxx

CAUSE: xxxxxxxxx
SOLUTION: xxxxxxx

Chap. 20 - Pag. 54/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN
AUTHOR 330
EN 20 - Maintenance

20.8 Dismantling
(=a744_2.0_ce_bps_20.8_inp)

For the dismantling of the machine it is necessary to follow the normative in force, contacting specialized firms in
the discarding / disposal refuses.

THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN Chap. 20 - Pag. 55/56
AUTHOR 330
20 - Maintenance EN
.
(sp1)

Chap. 20 - Pag. 56/56 THIS MANUAL IS PROPERTY OF SCM GROUP S.P.A. - ANY TOTAL OR PARTIAL REPRODUCTION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN

You might also like